3.2.2
•
Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration.
•
Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation.
•
Error codes I column: Errors during initialization.
Error code
S
E
06050 06065 06080 Receiver HP sensor error
06051 06066 06081 Receiver motor control error
06052 06067 06082 Receiver HP sensor error
06053 06068 06083 Receiver motor control error
06054 06069 06084 Receiver motor control error
06055 06070 06085 Receiver motor control error
06056 06071 06086 Receiver motor control error
06057 06072 06087 Receiver HP sensor error
Description of the error
I
(when moving to HP)
Receiver HP sensor did not go
ON when the receiver was
moving to the home position.
(when moving to HP)
There was a trouble with the
motor control when the receiver
was moving to the home position.
(when moving to first falling
position)
Receiver HP sensor did not go
OFF when the receiver was
moving from the home position
to the first falling position.
(when moving to first falling
position)
There was a trouble with the motor
control when the receiver was
moving from the home position to
the first falling position.
(when moving to second falling
position)
There was a trouble with the motor
control when the receiver was
moving from the first falling position
to the second falling position.
(when moving slightly down
at the second falling position)
There was a trouble with the
motor control when the receiver
was moving down slightly at the
second falling position.
(when moving to first falling
position 2)
There was a trouble with the motor
control when the receiver was
moving from the second falling
position to the first falling position.
(when moving to HP 2)
Receiver HP sensor did not go
ON when the receiver was
moving from the first falling
position to the home position.
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Response
(References to replacement methods are
listed at the end of the table.)
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
•
Receiver HP sensor
•
Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
•
Receiver motor
•
Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU)
•
MDU
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
•
Receiver motor
•
Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU)
•
MDU
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
•
Receiver HP sensor
•
Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
•
Receiver motor
•
Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU)
•
MDU
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
•
Receiver motor
•
Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU)
•
MDU
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
•
Receiver HP sensor
•
Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
•
Receiver motor
•
Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU)
•
MDU
3-7
Дигитайзер Regius 110HQ ф.Konica Minolta |
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
||||||
|
Getting this network error message after power went out for a few seconds. I have resatrted the unit without success. What do I do?
RE: Computed Radiography Report Post
Sat Jun 04 2016Reply from tomcouts
This is a network error indicating that there is no communication between the reader and the control station. Make sure that if either one is connected to a network switch or hub that the switch is turned on. Otherwise power down both the reader and control station, then first powerup the control station until it gets to the logon screen then power on the reader. Also check all network connections to be sure that they are connected and secure. If this does not remedy the problem then you may have a corrupted job manager in which case it would have to be rebuilt, call the OEM for this if this is necessary.
Report Post
Sat Jun 04 2016Reply from FMC3626
I am getting this error message on the computer screen, not sure what it means: I am not getting the log on screen. Could you be kind to view this on a team Viewer with me? so you can see th error?
Report Post
Fri Jun 11 2021Reply from cchawinga2019_7624
please help me solve the same problem
Report Post
DIRECT DIGITIZER
REGIUS MODEL 110 CODE NO. 0902 (110) CODE NO. 1616 (110S)
Six Edition
Service Manual 0197 Manufacturer:
1 Sakura-machi, Hino-shi, Tokyo 191-8511, Japan
Introduction The Direct Digitizer REGIUS MODEL 110 is designed to read REGIUS Plates using a p hotostimulable hotostimulable luminescent material as an X-ray detector. This manual states the cautions and steps for the service engineers who will perform repair or maintenance of this equipment (or the system including this equipment). After reading through the manual, manual, please keep itit close so you you can refer whenever whenever needed.
Cautions 1. Unauthorized reproduction reproduction of any part part of this manual manual is prohibited. prohibited. 2. The contents contents of this manual manual are subject to change without notice. 3. Any discrepancies, discrepancies, errors or omissions noted should be communicated communicated to the manufacturer. manufacturer. 4. Notwithstanding Notwithstanding item 3. above, the manufacturer accepts no responsibility responsibility whatsoever whatsoever for any loss or decrease in profits arising from usage of the product.
Trademark Company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
i
How to Use This Manual Configuration of This Manual Caution about the safety and operation of this equipment are described in following 8 chapters in this manual.
Chapter 1: Warning and Caution Regarding Safety This chapter describes the caution regarding the safety before p erforming the repair/maintenance.
Chapter 2: Before Repair This chapter describes the basic knowledge about the equipment before performing the repair/ maintenance.
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to handle when there is a trouble on the equipment.
Chapter 4: Confirm Operation Using the Service Tool This chapter describes how to confirm the operation of the REGIUS MODEL 110. 110.
Chapter 5: Disassemble and Assemble This chapter describes how to disassemble and assemble the equipment.
Chapter 6: Adjustment This chapter describes how to adjust each units, which is necessary in repair/maintenance.
Chapter 7: Periodic Maintenance This chapter describes how to perform periodical maintenance of the equipment.
Chapter 8: Appendix This chapter contains technical information that can be referenced during repair/maintenance.
Important
Service tool on the REGIUS console will be used for setting and operation confirmation of the equipment. Please see the install/service install/service manual of the REGIUS console for the operation of service tool. The reference point (title) to the REGIUS consol install/service install/service manual listed in this manual is as of May 21, 2007.
ii
Alert Symbol Marks Alert symbol symbol marks are cautioning cautioning the interested interested person about the item or operation operation that might cause a danger to the operator or other people during the repair/maintenance repair/maintenance of the equipment (and system including the equipment). Read these messages and follow instructions carefully. carefully. Also, read and understand understand the instructions and safety standards before performing performing repair/maintenance repair/maintenance of the equipment.
Description of safety icon • Symbols indicating indicating that caution (including danger and warning) should be taken
General Caution
Fire Caution
Electrical Shocks Caution
High Temperature Caution
Rotating Object Caution
Magnetism Warning
Do not touch with a wet hand
Do not expose to moisture
Mobile phone prohibited
• Symbols indicating prohibited act
Prohibited
Do no not touch
Do not disassemble
Do not connect multiple wires
• Symbols indicating compulsory or required act
Ground
Remove pl plug fr from ou outlet
Signal Words Signal words indicate the degree of potential hazards in the product. There are three degrees of caution labels, and each is used depending on the level of risk and damage caused by incorrect use and mishandling.
DANGER This is used for a direct and urgent danger that can cause death or severe injury, major damage to the property like complete destruction of the equipment, or fire, if not avoided.
WARNING This is used for a indirect (potential) danger that can cause death or severe injury, injury, major damage to the property like complete destruction of the equipment, or fire, if not avoided.
CAUTION This is used for a danger that can cause minor or mid-level injury, injury, partial destruction of equipment, or loss of data in the computer, if not avoided. Probability of damage
Body injury (or damage to property)
High
Low
Death or severe injury (serious damage)
DANGER
WARNING
Mid-level or minor injury (minor damage)
WARNING or CAUTION
CAUTION
Damage to property only
CAUTION
iii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents Introduction…………………………………………………………………………….. i How to Use This Manual …………………………………………………………. ii Configuration of This Manual ………………………………………………………………ii
Alert Symbol Marks ……………………………………………………………….. iii Signal Words ………………………………………………………………………… iii
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions………………………………….1-1 1.1
Warning Labels ………………………………………………………………1-2 1.1.1
1.2
Position and Type of Warning Label………………………………. 1-2
Safety Caution………………………………………………………………..1-5 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4
Caution Based on Ordinance ……………………………………….. 1-5 General Caution …………………………………………………………. 1-6 Caution for Handling the Equipment………………………………. 1-7 Caution for Handling the Cassette…………………………………. 1-7
1.2.5 1.2.6
Caution During Service………………………………………………… 1-8 Treatment of Disposed Parts………………………………………… 1-8
Chapter 2 Before the Repair……………………………………………………2-1 2.1 2.2 2.3
Name of Parts ………………………………………………………………..2-2 Structure………………………………………………………………………..2-4 Principal Specifications ……………………………………………………2-5 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3
2.4 2.5
2.6
2.7 2.8
Equipment Specification ………………………………………………. 2-5 Read/Erase of the Image……………………………………………… 2-6 Control Unit Performance …………………………………………….. 2-8
Block Diagram………………………………………………………………..2-9 Position of Major Components ………………………………………..2-11 2.5.1
Insertion Unit ……………………………………………………………. 2-11
2.5.2 2.5.3
Receiver unit…………………………………………………………….. 2-12 Transporter Unit………………………………………………………… 2-13
2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7
Subscan Unit ……………………………………………………………. 2-14 Optical Unit/Eraser Unit ……………………………………………… 2-15 Detach Detection Unit………………………………………………… 2-16 Exterior ……………………………………………………………………. 2-17
2.5.8
Framework……………………………………………………………….. 2-19
Operation …………………………………………………………………….2-20 2.6.1 2.6.2
Operation Transition Diagram……………………………………… 2-20 Normal Operation (Image Read Action) ……………………….. 2-22
2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5
Initialization Action…………………………………………………….. 2-27 Erase Action …………………………………………………………….. 2-30 Optical Unit Maintenance Status………………………………….. 2-30
Handling the Cassette……………………………………………………2-31 Tools, Measuring Devices, Jigs, Etc., Necessary for Service ……………………………………………………2-32
1
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………..3-1 3.1
Workflow ……………………………………………………………………….3-2 3.1.1
3.2
Restore Operation ………………………………………………………. 3-3
Description of the Error Codes and How to Respond …………..3-5 3.2.1 3.2.2
06000 ~ 06037: Justifier Motor Errors ……………………………. 3-5 06050 ~ 06090: Receiver Motor Errors ………………………….. 3-7
3.2.3 3.2.4
06100 ~ 06143: Transporter Motor Errors ………………………. 3-9 06150 ~ 06182: Subscan Motor Errors…………………………. 3-13
3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8
06200 ~ 06231: Insertion ShutterMotor Errors ………………. 3-15 06250 ~ 06282: Lock Release Motor Errors………………….. 3-16 06300 ~ 06333: Justifier Sensor Errors ………………………… 3-17 06350 ~ 06385: Receiver Sensor Errors ………………………. 3-19
3.2.9 06400 ~ 06432: Back Plate Detection Sensor Errors ……… 3-20 3.2.10 06450 ~ 06483: Detach Detection Sensor Errors…………… 3-21 3.2.11 3.2.12 3.2.13 3.2.14
06500 ~ 06534: Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Errors ….. 3-22 06550 : Optical Unit/Eraser Unit Errors ………………………… 3-24 06601 ~ 06603: Fan Error ………………………………………….. 3-24 06650 ~ 06683: FPGA Errors ……………………………………… 3-25
3.2.15 14000 ~ 15000: Signal Process Errors…………………………. 3-27 3.2.16 23000 ~ 23900: Program Errors………………………………….. 3-28 3.2.17 24000 ~ 25200: Network Errors…………………………………… 3-28 3.2.18 26000 ~ 26900: Operation Errors………………………………… 3-29 3.2.19 Confirm the H-sync Signal………………………………………….. 3-31
3.3
3.4
Response to the Problems Not Displaying Error………………..3-32 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4
Network Related ……………………………………………………….. 3-32 Power ON/OFF Related …………………………………………….. 3-32 Signal Processing Related …………………………………………. 3-35 A strange noise from the device ………………………………….. 3-35
3.3.5
Faulty operation by users …………………………………………… 3-35
How to Respond on Image Defect …………………………………..3-36 3.4.1 3.4.2
Flow of Response……………………………………………………… 3-36 Image is Dark or Black in General
3.4.3
(Still With Structure of the Object)………………………………… 3-38 Image is Bright or White in General
3.4.4
(Still With Structure of the Object)………………………………… 3-38 Horizontal Streak in Part of the Image………………………….. 3-39
3.4.5 3.4.6
Horizontal Streak All Over the Image……………………………. 3-40 Vertical Streak…………………………………………………………… 3-41
3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 3.4.10
Quasi-Contour in the Image ……………………………………….. 3-42 Jitter (Jagged Vertical Line) in the Image ……………………… 3-43 Image Size is Different (Vertically)……………………………….. 3-43 Image Size is Different (Horizontally) …………………………… 3-43
3.4.11 Top and Bottom of the Image is Trimmed……………………… 3-43 3.4.12 Sides of the Image is Trimmed ……………………………………. 3-43 3.4.13 Unevenness is Not calibrated……………………………………… 3-44 3.4.14 Unevenness Calibration Data is Too High (MAX-MIN is Over 300 Steps) …………………………………….. 3-44 3.4.15 S Value Fluctuation……………………………………………………. 3-45 3.4.16 Not Enough Contrast (Raw Data) ………………………………… 3-45 3.4.17 Different Density Left to Right……………………………………… 3-45
2
Table of Contents
3.4.18 Dosage Problem (Compatibility Problem with mAs 3.4.19 3.4.20 3.4.21 3.4.22
Value and S Value, Etc.) …………………………………………….. 3-45 Sandy Image ……………………………………………………………. 3-46 White Dot…………………………………………………………………. 3-46 Black Dot …………………………………………………………………. 3-46 Monitor Display Problem (Film is OK)…………………………… 3-46
3.4.23 3.4.24 3.4.25 3.4.26 3.4.27 3.4.28
Duplex Image …………………………………………………………… 3-46 Sensitivity Calibration Do Not Fit Within Specification …….. 3-46 All Processed Images are Generally High in Contrast ……. 3-46 All Processed Images are Generally Low in Contrast …….. 3-47 Image Out of Focus …………………………………………………… 3-47 A White Image (Corrected Data Only) is Output…………….. 3-47
3.4.29 An Image is Slanted ………………………………………………….. 3-47
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool …………………..4-1 4.1
Before Confirming the Operation ………………………………………4-2 4.1.1
4.2
4.3 4.4 4.5
Outline of Confirming the Operation………………………………. 4-2
Display [Unit Test] Screen………………………………………………..4-3 4.2.1 4.2.2
Display [Unit Test] Screen (In Case of REGIUS Unitea)……. 4-3 Display [Unit Test] Screen (In Case of CS-1/CS-2/CS-3) ….. 4-3
4.2.3
Function Outline of the [Unit Test] Screen ………………………. 4-4
Confirming Operation for Each Unit …………………………………..4-6 Confirming by Step Operation …………………………………………..4-8 Confirming the Status of the Sensors……………………………….4-17
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………………..5-1 5.1
Before Disassembly ………………………………………………………..5-2 5.1.1
5.2
5.3
Precautions during Disassembly/Assembly…………………….. 5-2
Basic Works …………………………………………………………………..5-3 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4
Power OFF/ON…………………………………………………………… 5-3 Moving the Equipment…………………………………………………. 5-5 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit…. 5-6 Removing/Installing the Second Front Door………………….. 5-10
5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7
Removing/Installing the Optical Unit…………………………….. 5-11 Moving the Push Plate Unit ………………………………………… 5-17 Binding the Grounding Strap ………………………………………. 5-18
Replacing the Parts on the Insertion Unit………………………….5-19 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4
Replacing the Operation Unit (Operation Panel) ……………. 5-19 Changing the Mounting Location of the Operation Unit…… 5-20 Replacing the Eraser Cooling Fan……………………………….. 5-22 Replacing the Indicator………………………………………………. 5-23
5.3.5 5.3.6
Replacing the Barcode Reader …………………………………… 5-24 Replacing the Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor ………….. 5-26
5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10
Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) ……. 5-27 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LPB) ……. 5-28 Replacing the Shutter Open Detection Sensor………………. 5-31 Replacing the Shutter Close Detection Sensor ……………… 5-33
5.3.11 Replacing the Shutter Motor……………………………………….. 5-34 5.3.12 Replacing the Shutter Unit………………………………………….. 5-35
3
Table of Contents
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
Replacing the Parts on the Receiver unit………………………….5-39 5.4.1
Replacing the Justifier HP Sensor……………………………….. 5-39
5.4.2 5.4.3
Replacing the Justifier Sensor…………………………………….. 5-40 Replacing the Justifier Motor ………………………………………. 5-41
5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7
Replacing the Justifier Standard Sensor……………………….. 5-43 Replacing the Receiver Sensor …………………………………… 5-45 Replacing the Receiver HP Sensor ……………………………… 5-47 Replacing the Receiver Motor …………………………………….. 5-48
5.4.8 5.4.9
Replacing the Lock HP Sensor……………………………………. 5-51 Replacing the Lock Motor…………………………………………… 5-52
5.4.10 5.4.11 5.4.12 5.4.13
Replacing the Receiver (Receiver Unit Assembly) …………. 5-53 Replacing the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly…………………. 5-55 Replacing the Receiver Belt ……………………………………….. 5-58 Replacing the Justifier Belt …………………………………………. 5-60
Replacing the Parts on the Subscan Unit …………………………5-64 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3
Replacing the Subscan HP Sensor ……………………………… 5-64 Replacing the Simple Fixing Unit…………………………………. 5-66 Replacing the Encoder/Wires ……………………………………… 5-67
5.5.4 5.5.5
Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) …………………………………… 5-72 Replacing the Cable Bear…………………………………………… 5-73
Replacing the Parts on the Optical Unit ……………………………5-78 5.6.1
Replacing the LMD ……………………………………………………. 5-78
5.6.2 5.6.3
Replacing the LMC ……………………………………………………. 5-79 Replacing the Inverter ……………………………………………….. 5-80
5.6.4
Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy……………… 5-81
Replacing the Parts on the Eraser Unit…………………………….5-85 5.7.1 5.7.2
Replacing the Erase Lamp Unit (Halogen Lamp) …………… 5-85 Replacing the Hot-Cathode Tube Lamp ……………………….. 5-85
5.7.3
Replacing the Halogen Lamp ……………………………………… 5-86
Replacing the Parts on the Detach Detection Unit……………..5-88 5.8.1 5.8.2
Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Upper)……………. 5-88 Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Lower)……………. 5-89
5.8.3
Replacing the Detach Detection Roller…………………………. 5-91
Replacing the Parts on the Exterior …………………………………5-92 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4
Replacing the Second Front Door Lock Mechanisms …….. 5-92 Replacing the Interlock Switch ……………………………………. 5-95 Replacing the Noise Filter and the Circuit Protector Unit … 5-96 Replacing the Capacitor …………………………………………….. 5-99
5.9.5 5.9.6
Replacing Resistant Assy…………………………………………. 5-101 Replacing the Halogen Power Supply ………………………… 5-103
5.9.7 5.9.8
Replacing the PCU ………………………………………………….. 5-105 Replacing the Transformer Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 1) …………………………………………………… 5-106 Replacing the Standby Power Supply Unit Relay
5.9.9
(Interlock Relay 2) …………………………………………………… 5-107 5.9.10 Replacing the Standby Power Supply…………………………. 5-109 5.9.11 5.9.12 5.9.13 5.9.14
4
Replacing the Analog Power Supply ……………………………5-111 Replacing the Digital Power Supply……………………………. 5-112 Replacing the Transformer ……………………………………….. 5-114 Replacing the Digital Power Supply Cooling Fan …………. 5-117
Table of Contents
5.9.15 Replacing the MDU Cooling Fan ……………………………….. 5-118
5.10 Replacing the Parts on the Framework…………………………..5-121 5.10.1 Replacing the CIU …………………………………………………… 5-121 5.10.2 Replacing the MDU …………………………………………………. 5-122 5.10.3 5.10.4 5.10.5 5.10.6
Replacing the CF Card …………………………………………….. 5-124 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor………………………… 5-127 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor …………………….. 5-128 Replacing the Transporter Motor ……………………………….. 5-129
5.10.7 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor… 5-132 5.10.8 Replacing the Brush (Cleaning Unit) ………………………….. 5-133 5.10.9 Replacing the Tumbler (Upper) …………………………………. 5-134 5.10.10 Replacing the Back Plate Detection Unit…………………….. 5-135 5.10.11 Replacing the Cleaning Unit ……………………………………… 5-137
Chapter 6 Adjustment …………………………………………………………….6-1 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
Adjust Justifier Belt Tension ……………………………………………..6-2 Adjust Receiver Belt Tension ……………………………………………6-4 Adjustment of Justifier Motor…………………………………………….6-6 Adjust Wire Tension ………………………………………………………6-10 Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor …………….6-12 Adjustment of Pressing Amount………………………………………6-15
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance ……………………………………………..7-1 7.1 7.2
Maintenance Schedule…………………………………………………….7-2 Maintenance Performed Annually……………………………………..7-3 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4
Workflow……………………………………………………………………. 7-3 Power OFF ………………………………………………………………… 7-5 Secure the Maintenance Space…………………………………….. 7-6 Removal of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit………………… 7-7
7.2.5 7.2.6
Cleaning Brush and Check for Fallen Foreign Objects……… 7-9 Cleaning Cassette Absorption Magnet …………………………. 7-10
7.2.7 7.2.8
Greasing LM Guide …………………………………………………… 7-11 Greasing Transporter Lead Screw Unit and Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Unit………………….. 7-12 Greasing of Release Shaft Holder ……………………………….. 7-13
7.2.9
7.2.10 Greasing Justifier Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism ………………………………………………………………. 7-13 7.2.11 Attachment of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit…………… 7-14 7.2.12 Move to the Installed Location …………………………………….. 7-16 7.2.13 Power ON ………………………………………………………………… 7-16
5
Table of Contents
Chapter 8 Appendix ……………………………………………………………….8-1 8.1
8.2 8.3
Service Tool Screen (Unit Test)…………………………………………8-2 8.1.1 8.1.2
[Indicator] Panel………………………………………………………….. 8-3 [DC Motor] Panel ………………………………………………………… 8-3
8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6
[Pulse Motor] Panel …………………………………………………….. 8-4 [Linear Motor] Panel ……………………………………………………. 8-5 [Others] Panel…………………………………………………………….. 8-5 [Settings] Panel ………………………………………………………….. 8-6
8.1.7 8.1.8
[Adjustment] Panel ……………………………………………………… 8-7 [Monitoring] Panel……………………………………………………….. 8-8
Global Wiring Diagram…………………………………………………….8-9 Circuit Board Silk Screen Diagram………………………………….. 8-11 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4
8.4 8.5
6
MDU (Mechanism Control Circuit Board) ……………………… 8-11 CIU (System Control Circuit Board)……………………………… 8-12 LMC (Optical/Subscan Control Circuit Board) ……………….. 8-13 LMD (Motor Drive Circuit Board) …………………………………. 8-14
Contents of Barcode ……………………………………………………..8-15 Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter …………………8-16
Chapter Chapter 1
1
Safety Warnings and Cautions The caution regarding the safety before performing the repair/ maintenance is described here.
1.1 1.2
Warning Labels …………………………………………..1-2 Safety Caution ……………………………………………1-5
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.1
Warning Labels Various warning labels are attached to REGIUS MODEL 110 as shown below. Understand the meaning of the warning labels, and handle with care on the parts with warning cables during the installation or r epair/maintenance is performed.
Caution
1.1.1
Do not peel off or smudge the affixed label to prevent accidents during the service. Affix new label if the label is peeled off or you cannot read the dirty label.
Position and Type of Warning Label Exterior and optic unit 3* 3*
4
1 2 2
*: Position will differ depending on the operation panel position.
Inside second front door
5
6
7
9 8
12
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
No.
Contents/Warning label
No.
Contents/Warning label
1
Class 1 laser product
2
Laser caution
3
Do not sit
4
Laser output
5
Clearing a jam and lamp replacement procedures
6
High Temperature Caution
1-3
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
No.
14
Contents/Warning label
7
Interlock Caution
9
Magnet
No. 8
Contents/Warning label Magnetism Warning
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.2
Safety Caution Read and follow all safety cautions thoroughly before using the product. Be sure to observe the cautions described here, since it is regarding about the safety.
1.2.1
Caution Based on Ordinance
Caution regarding laser regulation To prevent danger, do not remove the external covers or touch inside the equipment except the service engineer with official training.
Laser unit specification of the REGIUS MODEL 110 Item Class Medium Wavelength Maximum output
Specification IIIb Semiconductor laser 660 nm 130 mW (CW) REGIUS MODEL 110 is laser class I product.
Notation According to Pharmaceutical Law Following are text from «Caution regarding usage (safety and prevent danger) of the medical electric equipment», required to attach by Notification Number 495 of Pharmaceutical Affairs Bureau, Ministry of Health and Welfare (June 1, 1972). Read this caution closely and operate properly.
Caution regarding usage (safety and prevent danger) of the medical electric equipment 1. Equipment should only be operated by skilled operator. 2. Note following items when installing the equipment. (1) Install in position where no water spills. (2) Install in location where air pressure, temperature, ventilation, sun light, dust, salt, sulfur, etc., does not affect the equipment. (3) Note the stability such as inclination, vibration, shock (including transport), etc. (4) Do not install where the chemical is stored or where the gas is generated. (5) Note the frequency and allowable current (or power consumption) of the power supply. (6) Confirm the status (abandoned status, polarity, etc.) of the battery power supply. (7) Connect to the ground correctly. 3. Note following items before using the equipment. (1) Confirm that the equipment works properly by checking the contact of the switches, polarity dial setting, meters, etc. (2) Confirm that the ground is connected safely. (3) Confirm that all the cords are connected properly and safely. (4) Be careful that simultaneous use of the equipment might lead to wrong diagnostic or cause danger. (5) Confirm the battery power supply. 4. Note following items while operating the equipment. (1) Be cautious that you do not go over the necessary time or amount needed for diagnostic or treatment. (2) Always monitor that there is no problem with the equipment and patient. (3) Perform appropriate measure, such as stopping the equipment safely to patient, when a problem is found with the equipment or patient. (4) Be cautious that patient should not touch the equipment carelessly.
1-5
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
5. Note following items after operating the equipment. (1) Turn the power off by prescribed procedure after returning the operation switches and dials to the positions before usage. (2) Do not unplug the cables by pulling on cable part or apply unnecessary force. (3) Note following items for storing location.
• Store in position where no water spills. • Store in location where air pressure, temperature, ventilation, sun light, dust, salt, sulfur, etc., does not a ffect the equipment.
• Note the stability such as inclination, vibration, shock (including transport), etc. • Do not store where the chemical is stored or where the gas is generated. (4) Organize the accessories, cables, electrodes, etc., after cleaning. 6. Clean the equipment so there is no interference on next use. 7. Do not tamper the equipment when it is malfunctioning, and let the professional perform the repair. 8. Do not modify the equipment. 9. Routine maintenance (1) Always perform a routine maintenance on the equipment and parts. (2) The equipment must be checked if it works normal and safely when operation is resumed after it has not been used for an extended period. 10.Operate properly in accordance with the User Manual.
1.2.2
General Caution
Do not perform any operation that is not mentioned in this manual There are hot spots and high voltage parts inside the equipment, and there is a possibility of burn or electrification if operated wrongly.
Always follow the contents of the warning label Always follow the cautions mentioned in this manual and the contents of the warning label affixed to the equipment. Personal injury or destruction of the equipment may result if it is not followed.
This equipment is equipped with a laser generating device (Class IIIb) Major damage could happen when this laser ray is projected on skin or eyes. Use the dedicated protection glasses when performing operation confirmation with the power on. This equipment can be considered as class I laser product only when the safety interlock is not released.
Person with cardiac pacemaker should not get close to this equipment There is a possibility of electromagnetic interference to a cardiac pacemaker
Removal of the external covers To prevent danger, do not remove the external covers or touch inside the equipment except the service engineer with official training.
16
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.2.3
Caution for Handling the Equipment
Terminate the operation when abnormal noise or smell, or smoke arise from the equipment Terminate the operation immediately when abnormal noise or smell, or smoke arise from the equipment. It may result to electrification, fire, or damage to the equipment by running the equipment with abnormality.
Do not trip on or step on the power supply cable Electrification, excess heat, or fire may result using damaged power supply cable.
Do not pull the power supply cable to unplug the power supply This may result to breakage of wire inside, and could cause excess heat or fire.
Do not place drink or foreign object on top of the equipment Do not place drinks, such as juice, or foreign objects, such as clips or pins, on top of the equipment. It is possible that the internal circuit will short, and cause fire, when there is water or metal foreign object inside the equipment.
Do not block the air intake or outlet of the equipment It is possible that equipment to break or decrease the image read quality when the air intake and outlet of the equipment is blocked.
Do not place object on top of equipment, or climb on the equipment There is a risk of injury due to the fall, or damage to the equipment.
Do not use the equipment that will generate radio wave, such as mobile phone There is a risk o f harmful influence to the equipment when you use the equipment that will generate radio wave, such as mobile phone.
1.2.4
Caution for Handling the Cassette
Do not disassemble the REGIUS plate. Photostimulable phosphor that is toxic when entered the body is used on the plate. Follow the procedure described below when the photostimulable phosphor (milky white) is exposed due to breakage of the protection layer on the plate surface.
• Get a treatment by physician immediately when you swallowed it. • Wash with clean water and then get a treatment by physician immediately when it got in your eyes.
• Wash with clean water immediately when it got on your skin. • Even if it did not get in your b ody, treat the plate so the photostimulable phosphor will not contact anybody, and dispose it according to the regulation.
1-7
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.2.5
Caution During Service
Do not insert wire or metal pieces Do not insert foreign objects such as wire o r metal pieces from the air holes or the gap of the body. There is a danger of electrification.
Always turn OFF the power supply during service There is a risk of major incident when the PCB inside the equipment, connectors, or cables are pulled out with the power supply still ON. Always perform these operation with the power supply switch in the OFF position.
Do not detach the lithium battery without discretion A lithium battery is installed on the CIU PCB in the equipment. There is a risk of explosion when the lithium battery is placed near the fire or place in the water.
Use the wrist band when handling the electronic parts inside the equipment Use the anti-static wrist band when handling the electronic parts inside the equipment. It is possible to damage the electronic part by touching it with static buildup.
Unplug the power supply or turn the power switch to OFF while cleaning Always unplug the power supply or turn the power switch to OFF while cleaning the equipment. There is a risk of pinching your finger on the sliding or rotating parts.
1.2.6
Treatment of Disposed Parts
This equipment, accessories, and packaging material are considered as industrial waste. Always request a licensed industrial waste disposal firm in accordance to local regulations/rules to dispose them.
18
Chapter Chapter 2
2
Before the Repair The basic knowledge about the equipment before performing the repair/maintenance are described.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
Name of Parts …………………………………………….2-2 Structure ……………………………………………………2-4 Principal Specifications ………………………………..2-5 Block Diagram…………………………………………….2-9 Position of Major Components……………………. 2-11 Operation …………………………………………………2-20 Handling the Cassette………………………………..2-31 Tools, Measuring Devices, Jigs, Etc., Necessary for Service………………………………..2-32
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.1
Name of Parts Following are names of parts that is necessary to know when performing repair of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
Exterior 2
1
3 5* 4*
7
12 9
6 8
10
First front side 11 Second front back side
Second front side No.
Name
First front back side
Function
1
Air intake
Intake the air to cool the interior.
2
Cassette insertion slot
Slot to insert/eject the cassette to the REGIUS MODEL 110.
3
Status lamp
Displays the status of the REGIUS MODEL 110 with LEDs.
• • • • • •
Off: Stopped, starting up, stopping Blue light on: Idling Orange light flashing: Transporting cassette Orange light flashing fast: Ejecting cassette Orange light on: Cassette ejected Blue/orange lights flashing alternately: Malfunction
4*
Dummy operation panel
A cover on the side where the operation panel is not connected, out of 2 operation panel attachment locations.
5*
Operation panel
Message display window showing the status and errors of the REGIUS MODEL 110 and switches to operate the equipment is located. See « Operation Panel (page 2-3)» for description.
6
Second front door
A door user open to clear the cassette jam or replacing the erase lamp.
7
First front panel
An exterior panel.
8
Power supply circuit breaker
Turn ON/OFF power supply of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
9
Second front back panel An exterior panel.
10
Power supply port
Connect the power supply cable.
11
Ethernet connection port
Connect the ethernet cable.
12
First front back panel
An exterior panel.
*: Switch the position of dummy operating panel and operation panel when the equipment is placed vertically.
22
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Vertical Positioning The front side (user’s access direction) of the equipment can be changed by switching the operation panel position. Horizontal Positioning (Factory Default)
Vertical Positioning
Operation panel
Operation panel
Access direction
Access direction
Horizontal positioning: First front side will be the front. (This is the factory default.) Vertical positioning: Second front side will be the front. Position of the operation panel needs to be changed to install in vertical positioning.
Operation Panel
1 operation
2
erase
4
3
5 6
No.
Name
Function
1
Message display window
Displays the status and errors of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
2
“operation” lamp
Turns on when “operation” switch is turned ON.
• • • •
Off:
Stopped
Green light on:
Starting up, running, idling
Green light on:
Stopping
Green flashing slowly:
Sleeping
3
“operation” switch
Press to turn ON/OFF the REGIUS MODEL 110. Also, by pressing simultaneously with “erase” switch, it goes into optical unit maintenance (user maintenance) mode.
4
“erase” lamp
Turns on during erase mode.
5
“erase” switch
Press to erase the image information on the plate.
6
Speaker
Alarm will beep according to the operation status.
• • • • •
Beep:
Going into or coming out of idling state
Beepbeep Beepbeep…: Ejecting cassette Bong Bong…:
Erasing
Beepbeepbeep:
Warning occurred
Pingpong:
Error occurred
2-3
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.2
Structure Following are the structure of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
1
9 3
2
8 7 4
6
5 No.
24
Name
Function
1
Insertion unit
Constructed of slot to insert/eject the cassette, operation panel, barcode reader, shutter open and close mechanism.
2
Exterior
Unit to separate from outer environment, such as light shield, vibration blocker, etc. Power supplies to supply power to control unit is located in the first front side.
3
Framework
Unit to construct the equipment’s frame along with the exterior. Sensors and motors relating to the transporter is installed. Also, control unit is installed in the first front back side.
4
Transporter unit
Move only the back plate (including the plate) of the cassette, locked in the receiver unit, will be moved to reading position (first front back side).
5
Receiver unit
Take in the cassette into the equipment with the receiver mechanism and fix the cassette with the justifier mechanism. Also, cassette will be locked or unlocked with the lock/lock release mechanism.
6
Subscan unit
Subscan (horizontal movement) the optical unit/eraser unit. Reading will be done during the movement from the second front back side to the second front side, and erasing will be done during the returning.
7
Optical unit
Read the image information on the plate by laser scanning unit and light condensing unit.
8
Eraser unit
Image information left on the plate will be erased with hybrid 2 step erase method using halogen lamp and hot-cathode tube.
9
Detach detection unit
Detect the warp or detachment of the plate in the back plate during read/erase.
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.3
Principal Specifications 2.3.1
Equipment Specification Dimensions
740 (W) x 365 (D) x 747 (H) mm
Weight
Approximately 100 kg
Floor height adjustment range
Up to 12 mm bump at the position of the foot adjuster
Noise level
During operation: 55 dB or less During idle: 42 dB or less (Excluding warning buzzer, user operating sound, etc.)
Power consumption
185 Wh or less (40 mR or less exposure, continuous processing of 14 x 17 inches)
Maximum power consumption
800 VA or less (100 V, 8 A or less)
Power supply
In Japan
AC 100 V ± 10% (50/60 Hz)
North America
AC 110/115/120/220/230/240 V ± 10% (60 Hz)
Europe
AC 200/220/230/240 V ± 10% (50 Hz)
Environment condition (Temperature/Humidity)
During operation: 15 ~ 30°C/35 ~ 80% RH (no condensation) Not operating: -10 ~ 40°C/10 ~ 95% RH (no condensation)
Periodic replacement parts
Erase lamp unit (erase count: About 30,000 shots)
Accessories
Power supply cable, operation manual
Available accessories
REGIUS cassette, REGIUS plate, JM, REGIUS console (CS-1/CS2/CS-3/REGIUS Unitea)
Applicable cassette Cassette type
Description
Readable cassette type
RC-110, RC-110R, and cassette with equivalent open/close/ separation mechanism with RC-110
Readable cassette size
14 x 17 inches, 14 x 14 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 10 x 12 inches, 8 x 10 inches, 24 x 30 cm, 18 x 24 cm, 15 x 30 cm
Exposure only cassette type
RC-110T (long length exposure), RC-110L (confirming therapy positioning)
Exposure only cassette size
RC-110T: 4 types (10 x 36 inches, 11 x 28 inches, 14 x 42 inches, 14 x 51 inches) RC-110L: 3 types (14 x 17 inches, 14 x 14 inches, 10 x 12 inches)
Cassettes produced before April 2004 can not be used.
Important
2-5
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.3.2
Read/Erase of the Image Processing Performance Reading resolution Cassette feed load time
• Standard read mode: 175µm • High resolution read mode: 87.5µm 45 seconds or less (14 x 14 inches/standard read mode)
• Time from the cassette is inserted until the cassette is ejected. Processing Performance
80 or more (14 x 14 inches/standard read mode)
• Number of cassettes process in 1 hour when the cassette is continuously inserted. QR value
3 settings possible between 125 ~ 500
• Low sensitivity (QR value: 125 ~ 249) • Normal sensitivity (QR value: 250) • High sensitivity (QR value: 251 ~ 500) QR value definition: Define as QR = 200 when the output signal value in 12 bit output is 1535 steps, with 2.58 x 10 -7 C/kg (= 1 mR is exposed with 80 kV tube voltage Reading dynamic range
Normal D range (4.0 digits: PMT output current range = 100 nA ~ 1 mA)
Digital tone steps
12 bit (4096 steps)
Cutout image size Cassette used Cassette type
26
Cutout image size Display size (mm)
Normal mode (pixel)
High resolution mode (pixel)
14 x 17 inches
352.0 x 428.5
2010 x 2446
4020 x 4892
14 x 14 inches
352.0 x 352.0
2010 x 2010
4020 x 4020
11 x 14 inches
275.0 x 352.0
1572 x 2010
3144 x 4020
10 x 12 inches
250.5 x 301.5
1430 x 1722
2860 x 3444
8 x 10 inches
199.5 x 250.5
1140 x 1430
2280 x 2860
24 x 30 cm
236.5 x 296.5
1350 x 1692
2700 x 3384
18 x 24 cm
176.4 x 236.3
1008 x 1350
2016 x 2700
15 x 30 cm
296.5 x 146.5
1694 x 836
3388 x 1672
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Optical Unit Laser scan unit Method
Laser scan by polygon mirror
Polygon face count
6 faces
Laser wavelength
660 nm
Laser intensity on the plate surface
35 mW or more
Imaging beam diameter
100 µm or less (main and sub)
Lens
2 group 2 lens
Light condensing unit Method
Light condensing by light guide and light condensing mirror
Elim Elimin inat atio ion n of of exci exciti ting ng ligh lightt
Elim Elimin inat atio ion n wit with h exc excit itin ing g lig light ht cut cut fil filte ter r
Eraser Unit Method
Using halogen lamp and hot-cathode tube
Subscan Unit Method
Drive: Linear motor drive method
Reading speed
Normal read mode: 38.54 mm/s High resolution read mode: 19.27 mm/s
Erase speed
During read mode: Variable speed depending on signal value, automatically select from 5 speeds
2-7
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.3. 2.3.3 3
Cont Contro roll Unit Unit Per Perfo form rman ance ce Major performance of the control unit is following. Image data generation function
• A function to generate generate image data data by laser scan scan
Image data compensation/ calculation function
• • • •
Communication Communication function
Moire elimination Gain offset Shading compensation and polygon correction Erase speed calculation
• A function to receive receive various commands • A function to send send the read image data to the specified specified destination
• A function to notify notify the equipment equipment status status
28
Control functions
sequen ce of controls, such as mechan ical • A function to perfo rm sequence control, optical unit control, signal processing control, communication control, etc., triggered by cassette insertion • A control to execute execute various commands received received via network
Calibration function (at maintenance/factory setup)
• • • •
A function for autogain/offs autogain/offset et Unevenness calibration function Sensitivity calibration function A function for image image position/size position/size adjustment adjustment
9 2
) d r a o B t i u c r i C e v i r D r o t o M (
V 6 / V 6 C D
) d r a o B t i u c r i C l o r t n o C n a c s b u S / l a c i t p O ( C M L
D M L
)
e 4 e g 1 g a a k S k n ( n i i r L ) L l o l s 1 a n a c c M i e i n L n a S a ) ( h h t c P c 3 1 i n e H e S U M n M ( r
l t i i n o U C n M a L c s b u S
a c s b u S
e g a k n ) i L 9 l S a ( ) i c r 2 n o a s M n ( h e r c e o t M S o
t i M n U k r c o e L v i e c e R
P H k c o L
e d o c n E
) 6 S ( r o s n e S r e r i e v v i e e c e c R e R
t i n U n o i t c e t e D h c a t e D t / t i i n n U t U l r i n a e c s U i a l t a p L c O i t p O
) e 7 g a S ) ( k n 2 r i L o l M s a P n i ( e c r o S n a t P h c o H e M r M r e e v i v i e e c c e e R R
n c o n g y y s l o P H
r e i l p i t l u m o t o h P
e g ) a k 5 n S ) i 1 L ( r l a o s m M c P s ( i i n n e n r a S o a h c P h t o e c e M M H
M r e r i f e i t i f i t s u s J u J
r e i f i t s u J
) 5 1 S ( p o T r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D h c a t e D
) 8 S ( r o s n e S d r a d n a t S r e i f i t s u J
) 6 1 S ( m o t t o B r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D h c a t e D
) 1 L H ( p m a t i L n n U e g r l e o s a a r H E
) V 5 . 3 C A / V 0 7 C A ( r e t r e v n I
p m a L e b u T e d o h t a C t o H
)
) 4 S ( r o s n e S r e i f i t s u J
) 2 1 S ( r o s n e S n o i t p r o s b A e t a l P k c a B
m r a l a
) d r a o
t i n U
B t i u c r i C l p h c e t n m i a a p w h P c L S i t ‘ » m » w t s r l i e a n n o n t n o L o S i » t i » a a t U r a a n e r e p P r e s o e i O D a e s a
) 1 P S ( r e k
) B N I ( p t i m n a U L n s
) ) 2 1 S S ( ( r r e o e o g s g s a n a n k e k e n S i n S i L n L n o ) l o l i i t t a c 1 a c c i c i e n e M t n ( a e a t r h D h e o c n c D t e s o e e e o M p M l M O C r r e r
) 1 B L L ( 1 r e t t i m E r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D t o l S
) 1 B P L ( 1 r e v i e c e R r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D t o l S
) 2 B L L ( 2 r e t t i m E r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D t o l S
) 2 B P L ( 2 r e v i e c e R r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D t o l S
) 3 S ( r o s n e S n o i t c e t e D p o r D e t a l P
r e d a e R e d o
) C D / C D ( U D D
) 1 M F ( n a F g n i l o o C r e
F / I l a n r e t x E
d r a C F C
r o t s i s e r r e d e e l B
V 5 C D
V 2 1 / V 5 / V 5 C D
) V 8 7 C A / 4 P U S ( y l p p u S r e w o P n e g o l a H
) W S _ H O ( t a t s o m r e h T
1 ) 0 1 1 S ( S ) e ( e g r 3 g a r a o k o k s k n s i n n r m M P i o i L n L e s ( S e l w n r l a a d e a t o i c S i c h m c o n P n a a e M a H a e r h R c r c r F M r h / t r t e e t e e t e i r r M M r n e o o o U t r p p p r o s s s e p n n n t r s a a a r r r o n T T T p a r s T n a r T
V 2 1 C D
) d r a o B t i u c r i C l o r t n o C m e t s y S ( U I C
) V 2 1 / V 5 / V 5 / 3 P U S ( y l p p u S r e w o P g o l a n A
V 4 2 C D
) 1 W S ( h c t i w S k c o l r e t n I
m r a l a
) 3 M F ( n a F w o l f r i a
) d r a o B t i u c r i C l o r t n o C m s i n a h c e M ( U D M
V 4 2 C D
) 2 X ( 2 y a l e R k c o l r e t n I
V 5 C D
) 1 X ( 1 y a l e R k c o l r e t n I
w o l f r i a
) 2 M F ( n a F
m r a l a
V 5 C D
) V 0 4 2 / 0 3 2 / 0 2
) V 4 2 / V 5 / 1 P U S ( y l p p u S r e w o P l a t i g i D
) V 5 / 2 P U S ( y l p p u S r e
w o P y b d n a t S
) t i n U l o r t n o C y l p p u S r e w o P ( U C P
— V V 0 0 2 1 1 1 C C A A
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5
Position of of Ma Major Co Components Position and function of the major components of each unit is described here.
2.5.1 5.1
Insertion Un Unit 5
6 11
10
3 4
9
2 8 1 7 No.
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Inse Insert rt slot slot dete detect ctio ion n sensor 2
Detects the insertion of the cassette. It is turned ON when the cassette (except 20.3 x 25.4 cm, 18 x 24 cm and 15 x 30 cm) is inserted.
2
Inse Insert rt slot slot dete detect ctio ion n sensor 1
Detects the insertion of the cassette. It goes ON when the cassette (all sizes) is inserted.
3
Barcode reader
Reads the barcode label on the cassette.
«5.3.5 Replacing the Barcode Reader (Page 5-24)»
4
Back pl plate dr drop detection sensor
Detects the presence of the back plate during insert/eject of the cassette. It is OFF when there is no back plate.
«5.3.6 Replacing the Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor (Page 526)»
5
Eraser cooling fan
Intakes air to cool the eraser unit.
«5.3.3 Replacing the Eraser Cooling Fan (Page 5-22)»
6
Operation panel
Constructed of switches, display window, and speaker.
«5.3.1 Replacing the Operation Unit (Operation Panel) (Page 5-19)»
7
Status lamp
Displays mostly the process status of the cassette.
«5.3.4 Replacing the Indicator (Page 5-23)»
8
Shutter
It is normally closed, preventing any foreign object to fall in, and opens only during the insert/eject of the cassette.
«5.3.12 Replacing the Shutter Unit (Page 5-35)»
9
ShutterMotor
Open and close the shutter.
«5.3.11 Replacing the Shutter Motor (Page 5-34)»
10
Shut Shutte terr ope open n det detec ecti tion on sensor
It goes ON when the shutter is open.
«5.3.9 Replacing the Shutter Open Detection Sensor (Page 5-31)»
11
Shut Shutte terr clo close se dete detect ctio ion n sensor
It goes ON when the shutter is closed.
«5.3.10 Replacing the Shutter Close Detection Sensor (Page 5-33)»
«5.3.7 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) (Page 5-27)» «5.3.8 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LPB) (Page 5-28)»
2-11
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.2 5.2
Receiver unit
7 9 6 8
4 5 2
1
10 11 1 1 12
3 No.
2 12
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Justifier guide
Fix the cassette by moving inward and push the cassette against the justifier standard standard block.
«5.4.11 Replacing the Justifier «5.4.11 Guide Unit Assembly (Page 555)»
2
Justifier sensor
Detects the presence of cassette when it is fixing the cassette. It goes ON when there is a cassette.
«5.4.2 Replacing the Justifier Sensor (Page 5-40)»
3
Justifier HP HP sensor
It goes ON wh when the ju justifier gu guide is at the home position.
«5.4.1 Replacing the Justifier HP Sensor (Page 5-39)»
4
Justifier motor
Justifier guide will move horizontally.
«5.4.3 Replacing the Justifier Motor (Page 5-41)»
5
Just Justif ifie ierr stan standa dard rd sen senso sorr
Dete Detect cts s the the pres presen ence ce of of cass casset ette te when it is fixing the cassette. It goes ON when there is a cassette.
«5.4.4 Replacing the Justifier Standard St andard Sensor (Page 5-43)»
6
Receiver motor
Hoists the receiver.
«5.4.7 Replacing the Receiver Motor (Page 5-48)»
7
Receiver
A platform platform to place the cassette when «5.4.10 Replacing the Receiver it is inserted into the equipment. (Receiver Unit Assembly) (Page 5-53)»
8
Receiv eiver HP sens ensor
It goes ON when the rec receiver is at the home position.
«5.4.6 Replacing the Receiver HP Sensor (Page 5-47)»
9
Receiver sensor
It goes ON when there is a cassette on the receiver.
«5.4.5 Replacing the Receiver Sensor (Page 5-45)»
10
Lock Motor
Move the lock/lock release shaft holder, performing lock/lock release of the cassette.
«5.4.9 Replacing the Lock Motor (Page 5-52)»
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.3
No.
Name
Function
11
Lock HP sensor
Use to control the operation of Lock Motor by the FPGA. Initial position is ON.
12
Lock/lock release mechanism
Operate by Lock Motor, performing lock/lock release of the cassette.
Reference on replacement method «5.4.8 Replacing the Lock HP Sensor (Page 5-51)» —
Transporter Unit 6 1 6
2 3
4
7 5 7
No.
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Transporter motor (*1)
Move the push plate unit.
«5.10.6 Replacing the Transporter Motor (Page 5-129)»
2
Transporter read sensor (*1)
It goes ON when the push plate is at the read position (*3).
«5.10.5 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor (Page 5-128)»
3
Transporter HP sensor (*1)
It goes ON when the push plate unit is at the home position.
«5.10.4 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor (Page 5-127)»
4
Push plate unit
Absorb the back plate of the cassette. Cannot replace on-site.
5
Back plate absorption detection sensor (*1)
It goes ON when the push plate is at the read position (*3) and back plate is absorbed.
6
Tumbler (top) (*1)
Fix the push plate unit to read position (*3) with a spring.
«5.10.9 Replacing the Tumbler (Upper) (Page 5-134)»
7
Tumbler (bottom) (*2)
Fix the push plate unit to read position (*3) with a spring.
«5.5.4 Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) (Page 5-72)»
«5.10.7 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor (Page 5-132)»
*1: Parts attached to the framework. *2: Parts attached to the subscan unit. *3: Read position is the position to read/erase the plate, at the first front back side.
2-13
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.4
Subscan Unit
7
6
1 2 1
5
4 3 No.
2 14
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Tumbler (bottom)
Fix the push plate unit to read position with a spring.
«5.5.4 Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) (Page 5-72)»
2
Wire
Used on the position control encoder.
«5.5.3 Replacing the Encoder/ Wires (Page 5-67)»
3
Magnet shaft
A shaft for the subscan motor.
Cannot replace on-site.
4
LM block
A block running on top of the LM guide. Use these grease nipples to grease.
Cannot replace on-site.
5
Subscan motor (LM coil unit)
Move the holding plate with the optical unit.
Cannot replace on-site.
6
Subscan HP sensor
It goes ON when the holding plate is at the home position.
«5.5.1 Replacing the Subscan HP Sensor (Page 5-64)»
7
Encoder
Performs position control.
«5.5.3 Replacing the Encoder/ Wires (Page 5-67)»
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.5
Optical Unit/Eraser Unit
1
1
4 3
2 5
Eraser unit No. 1
Name Erase lamp unit
Function Halogen lamp is built-in, erasing the recording of the plate.
Reference on replacement method
• Unit: Instruction manual • Halogen lamp only: «5.7.3 Replacing the Halogen Lamp (Page 5-86)»
2
Hot-cathode tube lamp
Erase the recording of the plate.
«5.7.2 Replacing the HotCathode Tube Lamp (Page 585)»
Optical unit No.
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
3
Inverter
An inverter for the hot-cathode tube lamp.
«5.6.3 Replacing the Inverter (Page 5-80)»
4
LMC
A circuit board to control the subscan motors and sensors.
«5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)»
5
LMD
A drive circuit board for subscan motor (LM coil unit).
«5.6.1 Replacing the LMD (Page 5-78)»
2-15
DIRECT DIGITIZER
REGIUS MODEL 110 CODE NO. 0902 (110) CODE NO. 1616 (110S)
Six Edition
Service Manual
0197 Manufacturer: 1 Sakura-machi, Hino-shi, Tokyo 191-8511, Japan
0902YG220.book
0 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220.book
i ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Introduction The Direct Digitizer REGIUS MODEL 110 is designed to read REGIUS Plates using a photostimulable luminescent material as an X-ray detector. This manual states the cautions and steps for the service engineers who will perform repair or maintenance of this equipment (or the system including this equipment). After reading through the manual, please keep it close so you can refer whenever needed.
Cautions 1. 2. 3. 4.
Unauthorized reproduction of any part of this manual is prohibited. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. Any discrepancies, errors or omissions noted should be communicated to the manufacturer. Notwithstanding item 3. above, the manufacturer accepts no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or decrease in profits arising from usage of the product.
Trademark Company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
i
0902YG220.book
ii ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
How to Use This Manual Configuration of This Manual Caution about the safety and operation of this equipment are described in following 8 chapters in this manual.
Chapter 1: Warning and Caution Regarding Safety This chapter describes the caution regarding the safety before performing the repair/maintenance.
Chapter 2: Before Repair This chapter describes the basic knowledge about the equipment before performing the repair/ maintenance.
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to handle when there is a trouble on the equipment.
Chapter 4: Confirm Operation Using the Service Tool This chapter describes how to confirm the operation of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
Chapter 5: Disassemble and Assemble This chapter describes how to disassemble and assemble the equipment.
Chapter 6: Adjustment This chapter describes how to adjust each units, which is necessary in repair/maintenance.
Chapter 7: Periodic Maintenance This chapter describes how to perform periodical maintenance of the equipment. Chapter 8: Appendix This chapter contains technical information that can be referenced during repair/maintenance.
Important
ii
Service tool on the REGIUS console will be used for setting and operation confirmation of the equipment. Please see the install/service manual of the REGIUS console for the operation of service tool. The reference point (title) to the REGIUS consol install/service manual listed in this manual is as of May 21, 2007.
0902YG220.book
iii ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Alert Symbol Marks Alert symbol marks are cautioning the interested person about the item or operation that might cause a danger to the operator or other people during the repair/maintenance of the equipment (and system including the equipment). Read these messages and follow instructions carefully. Also, read and understand the instructions and safety standards before performing repair/maintenance of the equipment.
Description of safety icon • Symbols indicating that caution (including danger and warning) should be taken
General Caution
Fire Caution
Electrical Shocks Caution
High Temperature Caution
Rotating Object Caution
Magnetism Warning
Do not touch with a wet hand
Do not expose to moisture
Mobile phone prohibited
• Symbols indicating prohibited act
Prohibited
Do not touch
Do not disassemble
Do not connect multiple wires
• Symbols indicating compulsory or required act
Ground
Remove plug from outlet
Signal Words Signal words indicate the degree of potential hazards in the product. There are three degrees of caution labels, and each is used depending on the level of risk and damage caused by incorrect use and mishandling.
DANGER This is used for a direct and urgent danger that can cause death or severe injury, major damage to the property like complete destruction of the equipment, or fire, if not avoided.
WARNING This is used for a indirect (potential) danger that can cause death or severe injury, major damage to the property like complete destruction of the equipment, or fire, if not avoided.
CAUTION This is used for a danger that can cause minor or mid-level injury, partial destruction of equipment, or loss of data in the computer, if not avoided. Probability of damage
Body injury (or damage to property)
High
Low
Death or severe injury (serious damage)
DANGER
WARNING
Mid-level or minor injury (minor damage)
WARNING or CAUTION
CAUTION
Damage to property only
CAUTION
iii
0902YG220.book
iv ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Table of Contents
Table of Contents Introduction …………………………………………………………………………….. i How to Use This Manual …………………………………………………………. ii Configuration of This Manual ………………………………………………………………ii
Alert Symbol Marks ……………………………………………………………….. iii Signal Words ………………………………………………………………………… iii
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions………………………………….1-1 1.1
Warning Labels ………………………………………………………………1-2 1.1.1
1.2
Position and Type of Warning Label ………………………………. 1-2
Safety Caution………………………………………………………………..1-5 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6
Caution Based on Ordinance ……………………………………….. 1-5 General Caution …………………………………………………………. 1-6 Caution for Handling the Equipment………………………………. 1-7 Caution for Handling the Cassette…………………………………. 1-7 Caution During Service………………………………………………… 1-8 Treatment of Disposed Parts ………………………………………… 1-8
Chapter 2 Before the Repair ……………………………………………………2-1 2.1 2.2 2.3
Name of Parts ………………………………………………………………..2-2 Structure………………………………………………………………………..2-4 Principal Specifications ……………………………………………………2-5 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3
2.4 2.5
Block Diagram………………………………………………………………..2-9 Position of Major Components ……………………………………….. 2-11 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.5.8
2.6
Insertion Unit ……………………………………………………………. 2-11 Receiver unit…………………………………………………………….. 2-12 Transporter Unit………………………………………………………… 2-13 Subscan Unit ……………………………………………………………. 2-14 Optical Unit/Eraser Unit ……………………………………………… 2-15 Detach Detection Unit………………………………………………… 2-16 Exterior ……………………………………………………………………. 2-17 Framework……………………………………………………………….. 2-19
Operation …………………………………………………………………….2-20 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5
2.7 2.8
Equipment Specification ………………………………………………. 2-5 Read/Erase of the Image……………………………………………… 2-6 Control Unit Performance …………………………………………….. 2-8
Operation Transition Diagram……………………………………… 2-20 Normal Operation (Image Read Action) ……………………….. 2-22 Initialization Action…………………………………………………….. 2-27 Erase Action …………………………………………………………….. 2-30 Optical Unit Maintenance Status………………………………….. 2-30
Handling the Cassette……………………………………………………2-31 Tools, Measuring Devices, Jigs, Etc., Necessary for Service ……………………………………………………2-32
1
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………..3-1 3.1
Workflow ……………………………………………………………………….3-2 3.1.1
3.2
Description of the Error Codes and How to Respond …………..3-5 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.10 3.2.11 3.2.12 3.2.13 3.2.14 3.2.15 3.2.16 3.2.17 3.2.18 3.2.19
3.3
Network Related ……………………………………………………….. 3-32 Power ON/OFF Related …………………………………………….. 3-32 Signal Processing Related …………………………………………. 3-35 A strange noise from the device ………………………………….. 3-35 Faulty operation by users …………………………………………… 3-35
How to Respond on Image Defect …………………………………..3-36 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 3.4.10 3.4.11 3.4.12 3.4.13 3.4.14 3.4.15 3.4.16 3.4.17
2
06000 ~ 06037: Justifier Motor Errors ……………………………. 3-5 06050 ~ 06090: Receiver Motor Errors ………………………….. 3-7 06100 ~ 06143: Transporter Motor Errors ………………………. 3-9 06150 ~ 06182: Subscan Motor Errors…………………………. 3-13 06200 ~ 06231: Insertion ShutterMotor Errors ………………. 3-15 06250 ~ 06282: Lock Release Motor Errors………………….. 3-16 06300 ~ 06333: Justifier Sensor Errors ………………………… 3-17 06350 ~ 06385: Receiver Sensor Errors ………………………. 3-19 06400 ~ 06432: Back Plate Detection Sensor Errors ……… 3-20 06450 ~ 06483: Detach Detection Sensor Errors…………… 3-21 06500 ~ 06534: Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Errors ….. 3-22 06550 : Optical Unit/Eraser Unit Errors ………………………… 3-24 06601 ~ 06603: Fan Error ………………………………………….. 3-24 06650 ~ 06683: FPGA Errors ……………………………………… 3-25 14000 ~ 15000: Signal Process Errors…………………………. 3-27 23000 ~ 23900: Program Errors ………………………………….. 3-28 24000 ~ 25200: Network Errors…………………………………… 3-28 26000 ~ 26900: Operation Errors ………………………………… 3-29 Confirm the H-sync Signal ………………………………………….. 3-31
Response to the Problems Not Displaying Error………………..3-32 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5
3.4
Restore Operation ………………………………………………………. 3-3
Flow of Response……………………………………………………… 3-36 Image is Dark or Black in General (Still With Structure of the Object)………………………………… 3-38 Image is Bright or White in General (Still With Structure of the Object)………………………………… 3-38 Horizontal Streak in Part of the Image ………………………….. 3-39 Horizontal Streak All Over the Image……………………………. 3-40 Vertical Streak…………………………………………………………… 3-41 Quasi-Contour in the Image ……………………………………….. 3-42 Jitter (Jagged Vertical Line) in the Image ……………………… 3-43 Image Size is Different (Vertically)……………………………….. 3-43 Image Size is Different (Horizontally) …………………………… 3-43 Top and Bottom of the Image is Trimmed……………………… 3-43 Sides of the Image is Trimmed ……………………………………. 3-43 Unevenness is Not calibrated ……………………………………… 3-44 Unevenness Calibration Data is Too High (MAX-MIN is Over 300 Steps) …………………………………….. 3-44 S Value Fluctuation……………………………………………………. 3-45 Not Enough Contrast (Raw Data) ………………………………… 3-45 Different Density Left to Right……………………………………… 3-45
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Table of Contents
3.4.18 Dosage Problem (Compatibility Problem with mAs Value and S Value, Etc.) …………………………………………….. 3-45 3.4.19 Sandy Image ……………………………………………………………. 3-46 3.4.20 White Dot…………………………………………………………………. 3-46 3.4.21 Black Dot …………………………………………………………………. 3-46 3.4.22 Monitor Display Problem (Film is OK)…………………………… 3-46 3.4.23 Duplex Image …………………………………………………………… 3-46 3.4.24 Sensitivity Calibration Do Not Fit Within Specification …….. 3-46 3.4.25 All Processed Images are Generally High in Contrast ……. 3-46 3.4.26 All Processed Images are Generally Low in Contrast …….. 3-47 3.4.27 Image Out of Focus …………………………………………………… 3-47 3.4.28 A White Image (Corrected Data Only) is Output…………….. 3-47 3.4.29 An Image is Slanted ………………………………………………….. 3-47
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool …………………..4-1 4.1
Before Confirming the Operation ………………………………………4-2 4.1.1
4.2
Display [Unit Test] Screen ………………………………………………..4-3 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3
4.3 4.4 4.5
Outline of Confirming the Operation ………………………………. 4-2 Display [Unit Test] Screen (In Case of REGIUS Unitea)……. 4-3 Display [Unit Test] Screen (In Case of CS-1/CS-2/CS-3) ….. 4-3 Function Outline of the [Unit Test] Screen ………………………. 4-4
Confirming Operation for Each Unit …………………………………..4-6 Confirming by Step Operation …………………………………………..4-8 Confirming the Status of the Sensors……………………………….4-17
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………………..5-1 5.1
Before Disassembly ………………………………………………………..5-2 5.1.1
5.2
Basic Works …………………………………………………………………..5-3 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7
5.3
Precautions during Disassembly/Assembly…………………….. 5-2 Power OFF/ON …………………………………………………………… 5-3 Moving the Equipment…………………………………………………. 5-5 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit…. 5-6 Removing/Installing the Second Front Door ………………….. 5-10 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit…………………………….. 5-11 Moving the Push Plate Unit ………………………………………… 5-17 Binding the Grounding Strap ………………………………………. 5-18
Replacing the Parts on the Insertion Unit………………………….5-19 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10 5.3.11 5.3.12
Replacing the Operation Unit (Operation Panel) ……………. 5-19 Changing the Mounting Location of the Operation Unit…… 5-20 Replacing the Eraser Cooling Fan……………………………….. 5-22 Replacing the Indicator ………………………………………………. 5-23 Replacing the Barcode Reader …………………………………… 5-24 Replacing the Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor ………….. 5-26 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) ……. 5-27 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LPB) ……. 5-28 Replacing the Shutter Open Detection Sensor………………. 5-31 Replacing the Shutter Close Detection Sensor ……………… 5-33 Replacing the Shutter Motor ……………………………………….. 5-34 Replacing the Shutter Unit………………………………………….. 5-35
3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Table of Contents
5.4
Replacing the Parts on the Receiver unit………………………….5-39 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10 5.4.11 5.4.12 5.4.13
5.5
Replacing the Parts on the Subscan Unit …………………………5-64 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5
5.6
Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Upper)……………. 5-88 Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Lower)……………. 5-89 Replacing the Detach Detection Roller…………………………. 5-91
Replacing the Parts on the Exterior …………………………………5-92 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.9.5 5.9.6 5.9.7 5.9.8 5.9.9 5.9.10 5.9.11 5.9.12 5.9.13 5.9.14
4
Replacing the Erase Lamp Unit (Halogen Lamp) …………… 5-85 Replacing the Hot-Cathode Tube Lamp ……………………….. 5-85 Replacing the Halogen Lamp ……………………………………… 5-86
Replacing the Parts on the Detach Detection Unit……………..5-88 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3
5.9
Replacing the LMD ……………………………………………………. 5-78 Replacing the LMC ……………………………………………………. 5-79 Replacing the Inverter ……………………………………………….. 5-80 Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy ……………… 5-81
Replacing the Parts on the Eraser Unit…………………………….5-85 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3
5.8
Replacing the Subscan HP Sensor ……………………………… 5-64 Replacing the Simple Fixing Unit…………………………………. 5-66 Replacing the Encoder/Wires ……………………………………… 5-67 Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) …………………………………… 5-72 Replacing the Cable Bear…………………………………………… 5-73
Replacing the Parts on the Optical Unit ……………………………5-78 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4
5.7
Replacing the Justifier HP Sensor ……………………………….. 5-39 Replacing the Justifier Sensor …………………………………….. 5-40 Replacing the Justifier Motor ………………………………………. 5-41 Replacing the Justifier Standard Sensor……………………….. 5-43 Replacing the Receiver Sensor …………………………………… 5-45 Replacing the Receiver HP Sensor ……………………………… 5-47 Replacing the Receiver Motor …………………………………….. 5-48 Replacing the Lock HP Sensor……………………………………. 5-51 Replacing the Lock Motor …………………………………………… 5-52 Replacing the Receiver (Receiver Unit Assembly) …………. 5-53 Replacing the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly…………………. 5-55 Replacing the Receiver Belt ……………………………………….. 5-58 Replacing the Justifier Belt …………………………………………. 5-60
Replacing the Second Front Door Lock Mechanisms …….. 5-92 Replacing the Interlock Switch ……………………………………. 5-95 Replacing the Noise Filter and the Circuit Protector Unit … 5-96 Replacing the Capacitor …………………………………………….. 5-99 Replacing Resistant Assy …………………………………………. 5-101 Replacing the Halogen Power Supply ………………………… 5-103 Replacing the PCU ………………………………………………….. 5-105 Replacing the Transformer Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 1) …………………………………………………… 5-106 Replacing the Standby Power Supply Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 2) …………………………………………………… 5-107 Replacing the Standby Power Supply…………………………. 5-109 Replacing the Analog Power Supply ……………………………5-111 Replacing the Digital Power Supply……………………………. 5-112 Replacing the Transformer ……………………………………….. 5-114 Replacing the Digital Power Supply Cooling Fan …………. 5-117
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Table of Contents
5.9.15 Replacing the MDU Cooling Fan ……………………………….. 5-118
5.10 Replacing the Parts on the Framework…………………………..5-121 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 5.10.4 5.10.5 5.10.6 5.10.7 5.10.8 5.10.9 5.10.10 5.10.11
Replacing the CIU …………………………………………………… 5-121 Replacing the MDU …………………………………………………. 5-122 Replacing the CF Card …………………………………………….. 5-124 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor………………………… 5-127 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor …………………….. 5-128 Replacing the Transporter Motor ……………………………….. 5-129 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor… 5-132 Replacing the Brush (Cleaning Unit) ………………………….. 5-133 Replacing the Tumbler (Upper) …………………………………. 5-134 Replacing the Back Plate Detection Unit …………………….. 5-135 Replacing the Cleaning Unit ……………………………………… 5-137
Chapter 6 Adjustment …………………………………………………………….6-1 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
Adjust Justifier Belt Tension ……………………………………………..6-2 Adjust Receiver Belt Tension ……………………………………………6-4 Adjustment of Justifier Motor…………………………………………….6-6 Adjust Wire Tension ………………………………………………………6-10 Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor …………….6-12 Adjustment of Pressing Amount………………………………………6-15
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance ……………………………………………..7-1 7.1 7.2
Maintenance Schedule…………………………………………………….7-2 Maintenance Performed Annually ……………………………………..7-3 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.10 7.2.11 7.2.12 7.2.13
Workflow ……………………………………………………………………. 7-3 Power OFF ………………………………………………………………… 7-5 Secure the Maintenance Space…………………………………….. 7-6 Removal of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit ………………… 7-7 Cleaning Brush and Check for Fallen Foreign Objects……… 7-9 Cleaning Cassette Absorption Magnet …………………………. 7-10 Greasing LM Guide …………………………………………………… 7-11 Greasing Transporter Lead Screw Unit and Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Unit………………….. 7-12 Greasing of Release Shaft Holder ……………………………….. 7-13 Greasing Justifier Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism ………………………………………………………………. 7-13 Attachment of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit …………… 7-14 Move to the Installed Location …………………………………….. 7-16 Power ON ………………………………………………………………… 7-16
5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Table of Contents
Chapter 8 Appendix ……………………………………………………………….8-1 8.1
Service Tool Screen (Unit Test)…………………………………………8-2 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 8.1.8
8.2 8.3
Global Wiring Diagram …………………………………………………….8-9 Circuit Board Silk Screen Diagram………………………………….. 8-11 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4
8.4 8.5
6
[Indicator] Panel………………………………………………………….. 8-3 [DC Motor] Panel ………………………………………………………… 8-3 [Pulse Motor] Panel …………………………………………………….. 8-4 [Linear Motor] Panel ……………………………………………………. 8-5 [Others] Panel…………………………………………………………….. 8-5 [Settings] Panel ………………………………………………………….. 8-6 [Adjustment] Panel ……………………………………………………… 8-7 [Monitoring] Panel……………………………………………………….. 8-8
MDU (Mechanism Control Circuit Board) ……………………… 8-11 CIU (System Control Circuit Board)……………………………… 8-12 LMC (Optical/Subscan Control Circuit Board) ……………….. 8-13 LMD (Motor Drive Circuit Board) …………………………………. 8-14
Contents of Barcode ……………………………………………………..8-15 Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter …………………8-16
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 1
1
Safety Warnings and Cautions The caution regarding the safety before performing the repair/ maintenance is described here.
1.1 1.2
Warning Labels …………………………………………..1-2 Safety Caution ……………………………………………1-5
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.1
Warning Labels Various warning labels are attached to REGIUS MODEL 110 as shown below. Understand the meaning of the warning labels, and handle with care on the parts with warning cables during the installation or repair/maintenance is performed.
Caution
1.1.1
Do not peel off or smudge the affixed label to prevent accidents during the service. Affix new label if the label is peeled off or you cannot read the dirty label.
Position and Type of Warning Label Exterior and optic unit 3* 3*
4
1 2 2
*: Position will differ depending on the operation panel position.
Inside second front door
5
6
7
9 8
1-2
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
No.
Contents/Warning label
No.
Contents/Warning label
1
Class 1 laser product
2
Laser caution
3
Do not sit
4
Laser output
5
Clearing a jam and lamp replacement procedures
6
High Temperature Caution
1-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
No.
1-4
Contents/Warning label
7
Interlock Caution
9
Magnet
No. 8
Contents/Warning label Magnetism Warning
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.2
Safety Caution Read and follow all safety cautions thoroughly before using the product. Be sure to observe the cautions described here, since it is regarding about the safety.
1.2.1
Caution Based on Ordinance
Caution regarding laser regulation To prevent danger, do not remove the external covers or touch inside the equipment except the service engineer with official training.
Laser unit specification of the REGIUS MODEL 110 Item Class Medium Wavelength Maximum output
Specification IIIb Semiconductor laser 660 nm 130 mW (CW) REGIUS MODEL 110 is laser class I product.
Notation According to Pharmaceutical Law Following are text from «Caution regarding usage (safety and prevent danger) of the medical electric equipment», required to attach by Notification Number 495 of Pharmaceutical Affairs Bureau, Ministry of Health and Welfare (June 1, 1972). Read this caution closely and operate properly.
Caution regarding usage (safety and prevent danger) of the medical electric equipment 1. Equipment should only be operated by skilled operator. 2. Note following items when installing the equipment. (1) Install in position where no water spills. (2) Install in location where air pressure, temperature, ventilation, sun light, dust, salt, sulfur, etc., does not affect the equipment. (3) Note the stability such as inclination, vibration, shock (including transport), etc. (4) Do not install where the chemical is stored or where the gas is generated. (5) Note the frequency and allowable current (or power consumption) of the power supply. (6) Confirm the status (abandoned status, polarity, etc.) of the battery power supply. (7) Connect to the ground correctly. 3. Note following items before using the equipment. (1) Confirm that the equipment works properly by checking the contact of the switches, polarity dial setting, meters, etc. (2) Confirm that the ground is connected safely. (3) Confirm that all the cords are connected properly and safely. (4) Be careful that simultaneous use of the equipment might lead to wrong diagnostic or cause danger. (5) Confirm the battery power supply. 4. Note following items while operating the equipment. (1) Be cautious that you do not go over the necessary time or amount needed for diagnostic or treatment. (2) Always monitor that there is no problem with the equipment and patient. (3) Perform appropriate measure, such as stopping the equipment safely to patient, when a problem is found with the equipment or patient. (4) Be cautious that patient should not touch the equipment carelessly.
1-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
5. Note following items after operating the equipment. (1) Turn the power off by prescribed procedure after returning the operation switches and dials to the positions before usage. (2) Do not unplug the cables by pulling on cable part or apply unnecessary force. (3) Note following items for storing location.
• Store in position where no water spills. • Store in location where air pressure, temperature, ventilation, sun light, dust, salt, sulfur, etc., does not affect the equipment. • Note the stability such as inclination, vibration, shock (including transport), etc. • Do not store where the chemical is stored or where the gas is generated. (4) Organize the accessories, cables, electrodes, etc., after cleaning. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Clean the equipment so there is no interference on next use. Do not tamper the equipment when it is malfunctioning, and let the professional perform the repair. Do not modify the equipment. Routine maintenance (1) Always perform a routine maintenance on the equipment and parts. (2) The equipment must be checked if it works normal and safely when operation is resumed after it has not been used for an extended period.
10.Operate properly in accordance with the User Manual.
1.2.2
General Caution
Do not perform any operation that is not mentioned in this manual There are hot spots and high voltage parts inside the equipment, and there is a possibility of burn or electrification if operated wrongly.
Always follow the contents of the warning label Always follow the cautions mentioned in this manual and the contents of the warning label affixed to the equipment. Personal injury or destruction of the equipment may result if it is not followed.
This equipment is equipped with a laser generating device (Class IIIb) Major damage could happen when this laser ray is projected on skin or eyes. Use the dedicated protection glasses when performing operation confirmation with the power on. This equipment can be considered as class I laser product only when the safety interlock is not released.
Person with cardiac pacemaker should not get close to this equipment There is a possibility of electromagnetic interference to a cardiac pacemaker
Removal of the external covers To prevent danger, do not remove the external covers or touch inside the equipment except the service engineer with official training.
1-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.2.3
Caution for Handling the Equipment
Terminate the operation when abnormal noise or smell, or smoke arise from the equipment Terminate the operation immediately when abnormal noise or smell, or smoke arise from the equipment. It may result to electrification, fire, or damage to the equipment by running the equipment with abnormality.
Do not trip on or step on the power supply cable Electrification, excess heat, or fire may result using damaged power supply cable.
Do not pull the power supply cable to unplug the power supply This may result to breakage of wire inside, and could cause excess heat or fire.
Do not place drink or foreign object on top of the equipment Do not place drinks, such as juice, or foreign objects, such as clips or pins, on top of the equipment. It is possible that the internal circuit will short, and cause fire, when there is water or metal foreign object inside the equipment.
Do not block the air intake or outlet of the equipment It is possible that equipment to break or decrease the image read quality when the air intake and outlet of the equipment is blocked.
Do not place object on top of equipment, or climb on the equipment There is a risk of injury due to the fall, or damage to the equipment.
Do not use the equipment that will generate radio wave, such as mobile phone There is a risk of harmful influence to the equipment when you use the equipment that will generate radio wave, such as mobile phone.
1.2.4
Caution for Handling the Cassette
Do not disassemble the REGIUS plate. Photostimulable phosphor that is toxic when entered the body is used on the plate. Follow the procedure described below when the photostimulable phosphor (milky white) is exposed due to breakage of the protection layer on the plate surface.
• Get a treatment by physician immediately when you swallowed it. • Wash with clean water and then get a treatment by physician immediately when it got in your eyes.
• Wash with clean water immediately when it got on your skin. • Even if it did not get in your body, treat the plate so the photostimulable phosphor will not contact anybody, and dispose it according to the regulation.
1-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 1 Safety Warnings and Cautions
1.2.5
Caution During Service
Do not insert wire or metal pieces Do not insert foreign objects such as wire or metal pieces from the air holes or the gap of the body. There is a danger of electrification.
Always turn OFF the power supply during service There is a risk of major incident when the PCB inside the equipment, connectors, or cables are pulled out with the power supply still ON. Always perform these operation with the power supply switch in the OFF position.
Do not detach the lithium battery without discretion A lithium battery is installed on the CIU PCB in the equipment. There is a risk of explosion when the lithium battery is placed near the fire or place in the water.
Use the wrist band when handling the electronic parts inside the equipment Use the anti-static wrist band when handling the electronic parts inside the equipment. It is possible to damage the electronic part by touching it with static buildup.
Unplug the power supply or turn the power switch to OFF while cleaning Always unplug the power supply or turn the power switch to OFF while cleaning the equipment. There is a risk of pinching your finger on the sliding or rotating parts.
1.2.6
Treatment of Disposed Parts
This equipment, accessories, and packaging material are considered as industrial waste. Always request a licensed industrial waste disposal firm in accordance to local regulations/rules to dispose them.
1-8
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 2
2
Before the Repair The basic knowledge about the equipment before performing the repair/maintenance are described.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
Name of Parts …………………………………………….2-2 Structure ……………………………………………………2-4 Principal Specifications ………………………………..2-5 Block Diagram…………………………………………….2-9 Position of Major Components……………………. 2-11 Operation …………………………………………………2-20 Handling the Cassette………………………………..2-31 Tools, Measuring Devices, Jigs, Etc., Necessary for Service………………………………..2-32
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.1
Name of Parts Following are names of parts that is necessary to know when performing repair of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
Exterior 2
1
3 5* 4*
7
12 9
6 8
10
First front side 11 Second front back side
Second front side No.
Name
First front back side
Function
1
Air intake
Intake the air to cool the interior.
2
Cassette insertion slot
Slot to insert/eject the cassette to the REGIUS MODEL 110.
3
Status lamp
Displays the status of the REGIUS MODEL 110 with LEDs.
• • • • • •
Off: Stopped, starting up, stopping Blue light on: Idling Orange light flashing: Transporting cassette Orange light flashing fast: Ejecting cassette Orange light on: Cassette ejected Blue/orange lights flashing alternately: Malfunction
4*
Dummy operation panel
A cover on the side where the operation panel is not connected, out of 2 operation panel attachment locations.
5*
Operation panel
Message display window showing the status and errors of the REGIUS MODEL 110 and switches to operate the equipment is located. See « Operation Panel (page 2-3)» for description.
6
Second front door
A door user open to clear the cassette jam or replacing the erase lamp.
7
First front panel
An exterior panel.
8
Power supply circuit breaker
Turn ON/OFF power supply of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
9
Second front back panel An exterior panel.
10
Power supply port
Connect the power supply cable.
11
Ethernet connection port
Connect the ethernet cable.
12
First front back panel
An exterior panel.
*: Switch the position of dummy operating panel and operation panel when the equipment is placed vertically.
2-2
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Vertical Positioning The front side (user’s access direction) of the equipment can be changed by switching the operation panel position. Horizontal Positioning (Factory Default)
Vertical Positioning
Operation panel
Operation panel
Access direction
Access direction
Horizontal positioning: First front side will be the front. (This is the factory default.) Vertical positioning: Second front side will be the front. Position of the operation panel needs to be changed to install in vertical positioning.
Operation Panel
1 operation
2
erase
4
3
5 6
No.
Name
Function
1
Message display window
Displays the status and errors of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
2
“operation” lamp
Turns on when “operation” switch is turned ON.
• • • •
Off: Green light on: Green light on: Green flashing slowly:
Stopped Starting up, running, idling Stopping Sleeping
3
“operation” switch
Press to turn ON/OFF the REGIUS MODEL 110. Also, by pressing simultaneously with “erase” switch, it goes into optical unit maintenance (user maintenance) mode.
4
“erase” lamp
Turns on during erase mode.
5
“erase” switch
Press to erase the image information on the plate.
6
Speaker
Alarm will beep according to the operation status.
• • • • •
Beep: Beepbeep Beepbeep…: Bong Bong…: Beepbeepbeep: Pingpong:
Going into or coming out of idling state Ejecting cassette Erasing Warning occurred Error occurred
2-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.2
Structure Following are the structure of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
1
9 3
2
8 7 4
6
5 No.
2-4
Name
Function
1
Insertion unit
Constructed of slot to insert/eject the cassette, operation panel, barcode reader, shutter open and close mechanism.
2
Exterior
Unit to separate from outer environment, such as light shield, vibration blocker, etc. Power supplies to supply power to control unit is located in the first front side.
3
Framework
Unit to construct the equipment’s frame along with the exterior. Sensors and motors relating to the transporter is installed. Also, control unit is installed in the first front back side.
4
Transporter unit
Move only the back plate (including the plate) of the cassette, locked in the receiver unit, will be moved to reading position (first front back side).
5
Receiver unit
Take in the cassette into the equipment with the receiver mechanism and fix the cassette with the justifier mechanism. Also, cassette will be locked or unlocked with the lock/lock release mechanism.
6
Subscan unit
Subscan (horizontal movement) the optical unit/eraser unit. Reading will be done during the movement from the second front back side to the second front side, and erasing will be done during the returning.
7
Optical unit
Read the image information on the plate by laser scanning unit and light condensing unit.
8
Eraser unit
Image information left on the plate will be erased with hybrid 2 step erase method using halogen lamp and hot-cathode tube.
9
Detach detection unit
Detect the warp or detachment of the plate in the back plate during read/erase.
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.3
Principal Specifications 2.3.1
Equipment Specification Dimensions
740 (W) x 365 (D) x 747 (H) mm
Weight
Approximately 100 kg
Floor height adjustment range
Up to 12 mm bump at the position of the foot adjuster
Noise level
During operation: 55 dB or less During idle: 42 dB or less (Excluding warning buzzer, user operating sound, etc.)
Power consumption
185 Wh or less (40 mR or less exposure, continuous processing of 14 x 17 inches)
Maximum power consumption
800 VA or less (100 V, 8 A or less)
Power supply
In Japan
AC 100 V ± 10% (50/60 Hz)
North America
AC 110/115/120/220/230/240 V ± 10% (60 Hz)
Europe
AC 200/220/230/240 V ± 10% (50 Hz)
Environment condition (Temperature/Humidity)
During operation: 15 ~ 30°C/35 ~ 80% RH (no condensation) Not operating: -10 ~ 40°C/10 ~ 95% RH (no condensation)
Periodic replacement parts
Erase lamp unit (erase count: About 30,000 shots)
Accessories
Power supply cable, operation manual
Available accessories
REGIUS cassette, REGIUS plate, JM, REGIUS console (CS-1/CS2/CS-3/REGIUS Unitea)
Applicable cassette Cassette type
Description
Readable cassette type
RC-110, RC-110R, and cassette with equivalent open/close/ separation mechanism with RC-110
Readable cassette size
14 x 17 inches, 14 x 14 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 10 x 12 inches, 8 x 10 inches, 24 x 30 cm, 18 x 24 cm, 15 x 30 cm
Exposure only cassette type
RC-110T (long length exposure), RC-110L (confirming therapy positioning)
Exposure only cassette size
RC-110T: 4 types (10 x 36 inches, 11 x 28 inches, 14 x 42 inches, 14 x 51 inches) RC-110L: 3 types (14 x 17 inches, 14 x 14 inches, 10 x 12 inches)
Cassettes produced before April 2004 can not be used.
Important
2-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.3.2
Read/Erase of the Image Processing Performance Reading resolution
• Standard read mode: 175µm • High resolution read mode: 87.5µm
Cassette feed load time
45 seconds or less (14 x 14 inches/standard read mode) • Time from the cassette is inserted until the cassette is ejected.
Processing Performance
80 or more (14 x 14 inches/standard read mode) • Number of cassettes process in 1 hour when the cassette is continuously inserted.
QR value
3 settings possible between 125 ~ 500
• Low sensitivity (QR value: 125 ~ 249) • Normal sensitivity (QR value: 250) • High sensitivity (QR value: 251 ~ 500) QR value definition: Define as QR = 200 when the output signal value in 12 bit output is 1535 steps, with 2.58 x 10-7 C/kg (= 1 mR is exposed with 80 kV tube voltage Reading dynamic range
Normal D range (4.0 digits: PMT output current range = 100 nA ~ 1 mA)
Digital tone steps
12 bit (4096 steps)
Cutout image size Cassette used Cassette type
2-6
Cutout image size Display size (mm)
Normal mode (pixel)
High resolution mode (pixel)
14 x 17 inches
352.0 x 428.5
2010 x 2446
4020 x 4892
14 x 14 inches
352.0 x 352.0
2010 x 2010
4020 x 4020
11 x 14 inches
275.0 x 352.0
1572 x 2010
3144 x 4020
10 x 12 inches
250.5 x 301.5
1430 x 1722
2860 x 3444
8 x 10 inches
199.5 x 250.5
1140 x 1430
2280 x 2860
24 x 30 cm
236.5 x 296.5
1350 x 1692
2700 x 3384
18 x 24 cm
176.4 x 236.3
1008 x 1350
2016 x 2700
15 x 30 cm
296.5 x 146.5
1694 x 836
3388 x 1672
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Optical Unit Laser scan unit Method
Laser scan by polygon mirror
Polygon face count
6 faces
Laser wavelength
660 nm
Laser intensity on the plate surface
35 mW or more
Imaging beam diameter
100 µm or less (main and sub)
Lens
2 group 2 lens
Light condensing unit
Method
Light condensing by light guide and light condensing mirror
Elimination of exciting light
Elimination with exciting light cut filter
Eraser Unit Method
Using halogen lamp and hot-cathode tube
Subscan Unit Method
Drive: Linear motor drive method
Reading speed
Normal read mode: 38.54 mm/s High resolution read mode: 19.27 mm/s
Erase speed
During read mode: Variable speed depending on signal value, automatically select from 5 speeds
2-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.3.3
Control Unit Performance Major performance of the control unit is following. Image data generation function
• A function to generate image data by laser scan
Image data compensation/ calculation function
• • • •
Communication function
• A function to receive various commands • A function to send the read image data to the specified
Moire elimination Gain offset Shading compensation and polygon correction Erase speed calculation
destination • A function to notify the equipment status Control functions
• A function to perform sequence of controls, such as mechanical control, optical unit control, signal processing control, communication control, etc., triggered by cassette insertion • A control to execute various commands received via network
Calibration function (at maintenance/factory setup)
2-8
• • • •
A function for autogain/offset Unevenness calibration function Sensitivity calibration function A function for image position/size adjustment
2.4
0902YG220_020aJ.fm
2009年8月26日 水曜日 午後5時47分
Input Voltage Switch Tap
Transformer
Noise-filteringECRCEKVQT
Noise Filter (NF1)
Circuit Breaker (SW2)
AC110VAC120V
DC5V
alarm
air flow
PCU (Power Supply Control Unit)
Fan (FM2)
alarm
air flow
Interlock Relay 2 (X2)
Interlock Relay 1 (X1)
Digital Power Supply (SUP1/5 V/24 V)
DC5V
alarm
Interlock Switch (SW1)
DC24V
Fan (FM3)
Back Plate Absorption Sensor (S12)
Transporter Read Sensor (S11)
Mechanical Linkage
Transporter HP Sensor (S10)
Mechanical Linkage
Transporter Motor (PM3)
Transporter Mechanism
Transporter Unit/Framework
Justifier Sensor (S4)
Justifier Standard Sensor (S8)
Justifier HP Sensor (S5)
Mechanical Linkage
Justifier Motor (PM1)
Justifier Mechanism
Receiver Motor (PM2)
Mechanical Linkage
Receiver HP Sensor (S7)
Receiver Sensor (S6)
Receiver
Lock HP Sensor (S9)
Mechanical Linkage
Lock Motor (M2)
Receiver Unit
MDU (Mechanism Control Circuit Board)
Standby Power Supply (SUP2/5V)
AC IN (AC100/110/120/150/200/220/230/240V)
Eraser Cooling Fan (FM1)
Barcode Reader
Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor (S3)
Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Receiver 2 (LPB2)
Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Emitter 2(LLB2)
Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Receiver 1 (LPB1)
Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Emitter 1(LLB1)
Shutter Close Detection Sensor (S2)
Mechanical Linkage
Shutter Open Detection Sensor (S1)
Mechanical Linkage
ShutterMotor (M1)
Status Lamp (INB)
Insertion Unit
Speaker (SP1)
OPB (Operator’s Panel Circuit Board) LCD Panel «operation» Lamp «erase» Lamp «operation» Switch «erase» Switch
Operation Unit
Insertion Unit
Block Diagram
9 ページ
DC24V DC5V/-5V/12V
DC5V
Bleeder resistor
External I/F
CF Card
CIU (System Control Circuit Board)
DDU(DC/DC)
DC12V
DC6V/-6V
LMD (Motor Drive Circuit Board)
LMC (Optical/Subscan Control Circuit Board)
Inverter (AC 70 V/AC 3.5 V)
Analog Power Supply (SUP3/5V/-5V/12V)
Halogen Power Supply (SUP4/AC 78 V)
Thermostat (OH_SW)
Hot-Cathode Tube Lamp
Halogen Lamp (HL1)
Eraser Unit
Detach Detection Sensor Bottom (S16)
Detach Detection Sensor Top (S15)
Photomultiplier
H-sync
Polygon
Laser Unit
Optical Unit/Detach Detection Unit
Optical Unit
Encoder (S13)
Mechanical Linkage
Subscan HP Sensor (S14)
Mechanical Linkage
LM Coil Unit (LM1)
Subscan Unit
2-9
2-10
0902YG220_020aJ.fm
10 ページ
2009年8月26日 水曜日 午後5時47分
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5
Position of Major Components Position and function of the major components of each unit is described here.
2.5.1
Insertion Unit 5
6 11
10
3 4
9
2 8 1 7 No.
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Insert slot detection sensor 2
Detects the insertion of the cassette. It is turned ON when the cassette (except 20.3 x 25.4 cm, 18 x 24 cm and 15 x 30 cm) is inserted.
«5.3.7 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) (Page 5-27)» «5.3.8 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LPB) (Page 5-28)»
2
Insert slot detection sensor 1
Detects the insertion of the cassette. It goes ON when the cassette (all sizes) is inserted.
3
Barcode reader
Reads the barcode label on the cassette.
«5.3.5 Replacing the Barcode Reader (Page 5-24)»
4
Back plate drop detection sensor
Detects the presence of the back plate during insert/eject of the cassette. It is OFF when there is no back plate.
«5.3.6 Replacing the Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor (Page 526)»
5
Eraser cooling fan
Intakes air to cool the eraser unit.
«5.3.3 Replacing the Eraser Cooling Fan (Page 5-22)»
6
Operation panel
Constructed of switches, display window, and speaker.
«5.3.1 Replacing the Operation Unit (Operation Panel) (Page 5-19)»
7
Status lamp
Displays mostly the process status of the cassette.
«5.3.4 Replacing the Indicator (Page 5-23)»
8
Shutter
It is normally closed, preventing any foreign object to fall in, and opens only during the insert/eject of the cassette.
«5.3.12 Replacing the Shutter Unit (Page 5-35)»
9
ShutterMotor
Open and close the shutter.
«5.3.11 Replacing the Shutter Motor (Page 5-34)»
10
Shutter open detection sensor
It goes ON when the shutter is open.
«5.3.9 Replacing the Shutter Open Detection Sensor (Page 5-31)»
11
Shutter close detection sensor
It goes ON when the shutter is closed.
«5.3.10 Replacing the Shutter Close Detection Sensor (Page 5-33)»
2-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.2
Receiver unit
7 9 6 8
4 5 2
1
10 11 12
3 No.
2-12
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Justifier guide
Fix the cassette by moving inward and push the cassette against the justifier standard block.
«5.4.11 Replacing the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly (Page 555)»
2
Justifier sensor
Detects the presence of cassette when it is fixing the cassette. It goes ON when there is a cassette.
«5.4.2 Replacing the Justifier Sensor (Page 5-40)»
3
Justifier HP sensor
It goes ON when the justifier guide is at the home position.
«5.4.1 Replacing the Justifier HP Sensor (Page 5-39)»
4
Justifier motor
Justifier guide will move horizontally.
«5.4.3 Replacing the Justifier Motor (Page 5-41)»
5
Justifier standard sensor
Detects the presence of cassette when it is fixing the cassette. It goes ON when there is a cassette.
«5.4.4 Replacing the Justifier Standard Sensor (Page 5-43)»
6
Receiver motor
Hoists the receiver.
«5.4.7 Replacing the Receiver Motor (Page 5-48)»
7
Receiver
A platform to place the cassette when it is inserted into the equipment.
«5.4.10 Replacing the Receiver (Receiver Unit Assembly) (Page 5-53)»
8
Receiver HP sensor
It goes ON when the receiver is at the home position.
«5.4.6 Replacing the Receiver HP Sensor (Page 5-47)»
9
Receiver sensor
It goes ON when there is a cassette on the receiver.
«5.4.5 Replacing the Receiver Sensor (Page 5-45)»
10
Lock Motor
Move the lock/lock release shaft holder, performing lock/lock release of the cassette.
«5.4.9 Replacing the Lock Motor (Page 5-52)»
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.3
No.
Name
Function
11
Lock HP sensor
Use to control the operation of Lock Motor by the FPGA. Initial position is ON.
12
Lock/lock release mechanism
Operate by Lock Motor, performing lock/lock release of the cassette.
Reference on replacement method «5.4.8 Replacing the Lock HP Sensor (Page 5-51)» —
Transporter Unit 6 1 6
2 3
4
7 5 7
No.
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Transporter motor (*1)
Move the push plate unit.
«5.10.6 Replacing the Transporter Motor (Page 5-129)»
2
Transporter read sensor (*1)
It goes ON when the push plate is at the read position (*3).
«5.10.5 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor (Page 5-128)»
3
Transporter HP sensor (*1)
It goes ON when the push plate unit is at the home position.
«5.10.4 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor (Page 5-127)»
4
Push plate unit
Absorb the back plate of the cassette. Cannot replace on-site.
5
Back plate absorption detection sensor (*1)
It goes ON when the push plate is at the read position (*3) and back plate is absorbed.
«5.10.7 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor (Page 5-132)»
6
Tumbler (top) (*1)
Fix the push plate unit to read position (*3) with a spring.
«5.10.9 Replacing the Tumbler (Upper) (Page 5-134)»
7
Tumbler (bottom) (*2)
Fix the push plate unit to read position (*3) with a spring.
«5.5.4 Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) (Page 5-72)»
*1: Parts attached to the framework. *2: Parts attached to the subscan unit. *3: Read position is the position to read/erase the plate, at the first front back side.
2-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.4
Subscan Unit
7
6
1 2 1 5
4 3 No.
2-14
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Tumbler (bottom)
Fix the push plate unit to read position with a spring.
«5.5.4 Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) (Page 5-72)»
2
Wire
Used on the position control encoder.
«5.5.3 Replacing the Encoder/ Wires (Page 5-67)»
3
Magnet shaft
A shaft for the subscan motor.
Cannot replace on-site.
4
LM block
A block running on top of the LM guide. Use these grease nipples to grease.
Cannot replace on-site.
5
Subscan motor (LM coil unit)
Move the holding plate with the optical unit.
Cannot replace on-site.
6
Subscan HP sensor
It goes ON when the holding plate is at the home position.
«5.5.1 Replacing the Subscan HP Sensor (Page 5-64)»
7
Encoder
Performs position control.
«5.5.3 Replacing the Encoder/ Wires (Page 5-67)»
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.5
Optical Unit/Eraser Unit
1
1
4 3
2 5
Eraser unit No. 1
Name Erase lamp unit
Function Halogen lamp is built-in, erasing the recording of the plate.
Reference on replacement method
• Unit: Instruction manual • Halogen lamp only: «5.7.3 Replacing the Halogen Lamp (Page 5-86)»
2
Hot-cathode tube lamp
Erase the recording of the plate.
«5.7.2 Replacing the HotCathode Tube Lamp (Page 585)»
Optical unit No.
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
3
Inverter
An inverter for the hot-cathode tube lamp.
«5.6.3 Replacing the Inverter (Page 5-80)»
4
LMC
A circuit board to control the subscan motors and sensors.
«5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)»
5
LMD
A drive circuit board for subscan motor (LM coil unit).
«5.6.1 Replacing the LMD (Page 5-78)»
2-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.6
Detach Detection Unit 2
1
3 No.
2-16
Name
1
Detach detection roller
2
Top detach detection sensor
3
Bottom detach detection sensor
Function When the back plate or the plate on the back plate is detached more than certain amount from the push plate unit, it will touch the detach detection roller during the read. This movement will be detected by the detach sensor (sensor goes ON), and determined as an error.
Reference on replacement method «5.8.3 Replacing the Detach Detection Roller (Page 5-91)» «5.8.1 Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Upper) (Page 5-88)» «5.8.2 Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Lower) (Page 5-89)»
0902YG220.book
17 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.7
Exterior
12 14
13
11 9 10 3 4
2 1
5
6 7
No.
Name
8
Function
Reference on replacement method
1
Interlock switch
It turns ON when the second front door is open. All the power will be shut off, except for the electronic circuit board, when it is ON.
«5.9.2 Replacing the Interlock Switch (Page 5-95)»
2
PCU
A circuit board to control the ON/OFF when the operation switch is pressed.
«5.9.7 Replacing the PCU (Page 5-105)»
3
Transformer
4
Digital power supply
Supplies the power supply (+5 V, +24 V) for the digital components of the LMC, CIU, and MDU.
«5.9.12 Replacing the Digital Power Supply (Page 5-112)»
5
Digital power supply cooling fan
Cools the digital power supply.
«5.9.14 Replacing the Digital Power Supply Cooling Fan (Page 5-117)»
6
Tap switch connector
A connector to switch the input voltage. Switch to an appropriate connector overseas.
—
7
Interlock relay 1
A relay to cut power supply when the interlock is engaged.
«5.9.8 Replacing the Transformer Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 1) (Page 5-106)»
—
«5.9.13 Replacing the Transformer (Page 5-114)»
2-17
0902YG220.book
18 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
No.
2-18
Name
Function
Reference on replacement method
8
Analog power supply
Supply the power supply (±5V, +12 V) to the LMC.
«5.9.11 Replacing the Analog Power Supply (Page 5-111)»
9
Interlock relay 2
A relay to cut power supply when the interlock is engaged.
«5.9.9 Replacing the Standby Power Supply Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 2) (Page 5-107)»
10
Standby power supply
A power supply that is constantly ON.
«5.9.10 Replacing the Standby Power Supply (Page 5-109)»
11
Halogen power supply
Supply the power supply to the halogen lamp.
«5.9.6 Replacing the Halogen Power Supply (Page 5-103)»
12
Capacitor
13
Circuit protector (Power supply circuit breaker)
14
Noise filter
—
«5.9.4 Replacing the Capacitor (Page 5-99)»
Turn ON/OFF power supply of the REGIUS MODEL 110.
«5.9.3 Replacing the Noise Filter and the Circuit Protector Unit (Page 5-96)»
—
«5.9.3 Replacing the Noise Filter and the Circuit Protector Unit (Page 5-96)»
0902YG220.book
19 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.5.8
Framework 4 4
5
6
8 2
7
3
1
No. 1
Name Cleaning brush
Function Clean the light capacitor of the optical unit.
Reference on replacement method
• Brush only: «5.10.8 Replacing the Brush (Cleaning Unit) (Page 5-133)» • Whole cleaner: «5.10.11 Replacing the Cleaning Unit (Page 5-137)»
2
MDU
A circuit board to control the motors excluding subscan motors, sensors, LED, LCD, operation switches, speaker, and cooling fans.
«5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)»
3
CIU
Controls the system with the firmware.
«5.10.1 Replacing the CIU (Page 5-121)»
4
Tumbler (top)
A circuit board to fix the push plate unit to read position with a spring.
«5.10.9 Replacing the Tumbler (Upper) (Page 5-134)»
5
Transporter motor
Move the push plate unit.
«5.10.6 Replacing the Transporter Motor (Page 5-129)»
6
Transporter read sensor
It goes ON when the push plate is at the read position.
«5.10.5 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor (Page 5-128)»
7
Transporter HP sensor
It goes ON when the push plate unit is at the home position.
«5.10.4 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor (Page 5127)»
8
Back plate absorption detection sensor
It goes ON when the push plate is at the read position and back plate is absorbed.
«5.10.7 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor (Page 5-132)»
2-19
0902YG220.book
20 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.6
Operation 2.6.1
Operation Transition Diagram Status Transition Diagram REGIUS MODEL 110 in in one of the following status. Power Supply Breaker ON
Idling Press «operation» Switch
Boot
Shut down
Press «operation» Switch for 3 Seconds
Press «operation» Switch for 3 Seconds
Sleep Mode
Maintenance Mode
WakeUp
Press «operation» Switch for 3 Seconds
Leave Maintenance
Standby
Enter Maintenance
Routine Mode
Status name
2-20
Description
Stopped
Status where the OS is shut down. operation switch is monitored by hardware.
Routine mode
A main mode that does the read and erase of the cassette image. See « Routine Mode Operation Transition Diagram (page 2-21)» for more description about the status transition.
Sleep mode
A sleep status engaged with turning OFF the REGIUS console.
Maintenance mode
A status performing operation confirmation with service tools.
0902YG220.book
21 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Routine Mode Operation Transition Diagram Idling Press «operation» Switch
Initialization Process
Intergradation Resulting from Operation Automatic Intergradation Error Generated Close Door
Finished Open Door
Press «operation» Switch for 3 Seconds
«READY» State Press «erase» Switch for 3 Seconds
Insert Cassette
Image Read Action
ERASE MODE QUICK Status (Countdown) Insert Cassette
Finished
Timeout
Press «erase» Switch
Press «operation» Switch + «erase» Switch for 3 Seconds
Optical Unit Maintenance State Open Door
Eject Cassette Replace Lamp/ Cleaning
Image Erase Action (Fast Erase) Finished
Close Door
Eject Cassette
ERASE MODE SLOW State (Countdown) Insert Cassette
Timeout
Press «erase» Switch
Image Erase Action (Slow Erase) Finished Eject Cassette
Error State (Jam)
Open Door Clear Jam
Close Door
Initialization Process
Finished
2-21
0902YG220.book
22 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.6.2
Normal Operation (Image Read Action) Action from the insertion to the eject of the cassette is described here. Use the service tool to confirm operation. See «Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool (Page 4-1)». Numbers for each step (50~73) is corresponding to the steps of SeqID of the confirming operation using the service tool.
50 Sensor at the insert slot detects the cassette. 3
2
14
It is determined if it is a cassette or not by the status of the following sensors at the insertion slot when the cassette is inserted.
3
• Insert slot detection sensor 1 • Insert slot detection sensor 2 • Back plate drop detection sensor When the cassette is inserted correctly, insert slot detection sensor 1 and back plate drop detection sensor will both go ON. In all other cases, it will generate an error as foreign object insertion or cassette insertion position error.
1: Insertion Slot Detection Sensor 1 2: Insertion Slot Detection Sensor 2 3: Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor 4: Barcode Reader
51
Barcode reader reads the barcode. Following check will be performed by barcode reader reading the barcode.
• If the barcode is correctly read • If the plate size is smaller than calibration size • If there is no discrepancy between the inserted cassette (status of the insert slot detection sensor 1 and insert slot detection sensor 2) and the cassette size from the barcode.
52 Shutter will open and cassette will rest on the
9
8
receiver.
5
Shutter will open by rotating the ShutterMotor. Cassette will fall onto the receiver, and receiver sensor will detect the cassette.
5 6
6
7
5: Shutter 6: Receiver 7: Receiver Sensor 8: Shutter Open Detection Sensor 9: Shutter Close Detection Sensor
53 Receiver will lower to the first falling position. Receiver motor will rotate, according to the cassette size from the barcode, and receiver will lower to the first falling position. First falling position: The lowest position that the cassette will not fall out, without the support of the justifier mechanism.
2-22
0902YG220.book
23 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
54 Justifier guide will move toward the justifier
standard, pressing the cassette to the justifier standard block. Justifier motor will rotate, according to the cassette size from the barcode, moving the justifier guide to the justifier standard side.
14 12 10 11
13
10: Justifier Guide 11: Justifier Sensor 12: Justifier HP Sensor 13: Justifier Standard 14: Justifier Standard Sensor
55 Justifier guide will move to the slightly opened position.
Justifier motor will rotate, moving the justifier guide slightly (approximately 3 mm) to the home position side. Slightly opened position: A position slightly moved from cassette fixing position toward the home position to unfix the cassette.
56 Receiver will lower to the second falling position. Receiver will lower to the second falling position by rotating the receiver motor for appropriate pulses (depends on the cassette size) after the justifier guide completes its move. Second falling position: Position of the lock/lock release mechanism and open/close lock of the cassette will match.
57
The justifier guide will move toward the justifier standard and the cassette is fixed between the justifier guide and the justifier standard block. Justifier motor will rotate, moving the justifier guide slightly (approximately 3 mm) toward the justifier standard side.
58 Push plate unit will move to the press down
position. The shutter is close at the same time.
15
The transporter motor will rotate and move the push plate unit to the press down position. The shutter is closed by rotating the shutter motor.
15: Push Plate Unit
2-23
0902YG220.book
24 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
59 Lock/lock release mechanism will release the lock on the cassette.
Lock motor will rotate operating the lock/rock release mechanism, releasing the lock on the cassette.
16 17 16: Lock/Lock Release Mechanism 17: Lock HP Sensor
60 The push plate unit that absorbed the back plate will move to the read position.
19 18
Transporter motor will rotate to move the push plate unit to the read position. The back plate absorption sensor will turn ON when the back plate is absorbed correctly with the push plate unit at the read position.
20
61
18: Transporter Read Sensor 19: Transporter HP Sensor 20: Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor
22
21
The receiver will lower slightly (depends on the cassette size, 1 mm or less) by rotating the receiver motor at the end of movement of the push plate unit.
62 Optical unit will read the image on plate after
moving the subscan unit the holding plate toward the second front side. After waiting for the vibration to subside (1 second), the holding plate with the optical unit and the eraser unit will move to the second front side by the subscan motor.
21
23 21: Optical Unit/Eraser Unit 22: Detach Detection Unit 23: Subscan HP Sensor
The receiver is lowered slightly.
Optical unit will turn on the laser and read the image from the plate. If there is a warp or detach of the plate, this will contact the detach detection roller, then detected by detach detection sensor, and an error is generated. Subscan unit will stop when the image read action is completed, and prepare for the erase action.
63 Eraser unit will erase the image on plate after moving the subscan unit the holding plate toward the second front back side. The holding plate with the optical unit and the eraser unit will move to the second front back side by the subscan motor. While the subscan unit is in action, eraser lamp (hybrid 2 step erase method using halogen lamp and hotcathode tube) on the eraser unit is turned on, erasing the image on the plate.
When there is only 1 lamp When the erase reference value (e value) is large, an image might no be erased with only 1 pass. In such case, subscan unit will move back and forth the amount calculated from the erase reference value.
2-24
0902YG220.book
25 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
64 Push plate unit will move to the press down
position and press the back plate to the front plate. Transporter motor will rotate to move the push plate unit to the push down position.
65 Lock/lock release mechanism will lock the cassette.
Lock motor will rotate operating the lock/rock release mechanism, locking the cassette.
66 Push plate unit will move to pass the home position.
Transporter motor will rotate to move the push plate.
67
Push plate unit will move to the home position. Shutter will also open. Transporter motor will rotate in reverse direction to move the push plate unit to the home position. Shutter will also open by rotating the ShutterMotor.
68 Justifier guide will move to the slightly opened position.
Justifier motor will rotate, moving the justifier guide slightly (approximately 3 mm) to the home position side.
69 Receiver will rise to the first falling position. Receiver motor will rotate and receiver will rise to the first falling position.
70
Justifier guide will move to the home position. Transporter motor will rotate to move the justifier guide to the home position.
2-25
0902YG220.book
26 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
71
Receiver will rise to the home position. Receiver motor will rotate and receiver will rise to the home position.
24
24: Receiver HP Sensor
72
Sensor at the insertion slot will detect ejection of the cassette. Ejecting of cassette is completed when the following sensors turns OFF.
• • • •
73
Insert slot detection sensor 1 Insert slot detection sensor 2 Back plate drop detection sensor Receiver sensor
The shutter is closed. Shutter is closed by rotating the ShutterMotor when the cassette eject is completed.
2-26
0902YG220.book
27 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.6.3
Initialization Action Initialization action will be performed according to the timing of each status transition.
Description of initialization action per initialization operation timing Initialization timing
Initialization action
After power on
« Initialization of the FPGA» « Initialization and Operation Check of the Mechanical Unit» « Set the Parameters of the FPGA»
Transition from the stopped to the routine mode
« Initialization and Operation Check of the Mechanical Unit» « Set the Parameters of the FPGA»
Transition from the sleep mode to the routine mode
« Initialization and Operation Check of the Mechanical Unit» « Set the Parameters of the FPGA»
From the sleep mode to the maintenance mode
« Initialization and Operation Check of the Mechanical Unit»
Transition from the maintenance mode to the routine mode
« Initialization of the Mechanical Unit»
Transition after detecting the close of the second front door to the routine mode
« Initialization of the Mechanical Unit»
Transition after detecting the close of the second front door to the maintenance mode
« Initialization of the Mechanical Unit»
Initialization of the FPGA • Transmit the program in FPGA at the startup.
Set the Parameters of the FPGA • Set the gain offset value, drive pattern of the motors, factory setting of the shading compensation, and factory setting of the QRV table to the FPGA.
Initialization and Operation Check of the Mechanical Unit • Check if there is cassette inside the equipment and close the shutter. • Move the unit to the initial position. • • • • •
Shutter: Receiver: Justifier guide: Push plate unit: Subscan unit:
Closed Receiver home position Justifier home position Transporter home position Subscan home position
• Perform warm-up action and operation check of all units. (Warm-up action: Operate in a maximum operable range)
2-27
0902YG220.book
28 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Initialization and operation check sequence of the mechanical unit Start
Check Cassette Detection Sensor
With Cassette Jam Evacuation Action
Without Cassette Shutter Close?
No
Wait for Door Open
Yes
Shutter Open
Wait for Door Close
Shutter Close
Cassette Check in the Equipment is Completed
Shutter Warm-up Action is Completed
Shutter Close
Inverter ON
Initialization of Subscan Unit is Completed No
Move Transporter to Read Position
Evacuation of Transporter is Completed
Move Subscan Unit to Subscan Mechanical Position
Justifier at HP Position?
Subscan Unit Warm-up Action is Completed
Move Receiver to Second Falling Position for 14 x 17
Move Justifier to HP
Justifier Warm-up Action is Completed
Move Transporter to HP Pass Position Move Transporter to HP
Transporter Warm-up is Completed
Move Receiver to HP
Receiver Warm-up is Completed
Confirm Illumination Turn OFF Erase Lamp
No
Lock Action
Move Justifier Minutely toward Cassette Fixing Direction
2-28
Initialization of Receiver is Completed
Turn ON Erase Lamp
Yes
Move Justifier to Justifier HP
Move Receiver to HP
Move Transporter to Press Down Position
Move Subscan Unit to Mechanical HP
Move Subscan Unit to Mechanical HP
Yes
Move Down Receiver Minutely
Move Transporter to HP
Initialize Subscan Unit
Yes
No
Move Justifier to Cassette Fixing Position for 15 cm x 30 cm
Shutter Open
Transporter at Read Position?
Receiver at HP Position?
End
Initialization of Justifier is Completed
Erase Lamp Illumination Confirmation is Completed
Lock Warm-up is Completed
0902YG220.book
29 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Initialization of the Mechanical Unit • Check if there is cassette inside the equipment and close the shutter. • Move the unit to the initial position. • • • • •
Shutter: Receiver: Justifier guide: Push plate unit: Subscan unit:
Closed Receiver home position Justifier home position Transporter home position Subscan home position
Initialization sequence of the mechanical unit Start
Check Cassette Detection Sensor
With Cassette Jam Evacuation Action
Without Cassette Shutter Close?
No
Wait for Door Open
Yes
Shutter Open
Wait for Door Close
Shutter Close
Subscan Unit at Mechanical HP Position? Yes
Transporter at Read Position? Yes
Justifier at HP Position?
No
No
Yes
Move Subscan Unit to Mechanical HP
Move Justifier Minutely Toward Cassette Fixing Direction
No
Move Justifier to Justifier HP
Move Transporter to Read Position Synchronize
Move Transporter to HP
Receiver at HP Position?
No
Yes
Move Down Receiver Minutely Move Receiver to HP
End
2-29
0902YG220.book
30 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.6.4
Erase Action Erase mode is composed of 2 modes. It will go into the erase mode (quick) by pressing the erase switch for more than 3 seconds when the equipment is in READY status. It will transit to the erase mode (slow) by pressing the erase switch in the erase mode (quick) status. This erase action will perform the same action as normal image read/erase action, but only the read action will not be performed.
2.6.5
Optical Unit Maintenance Status A mode user use to perform the following maintenance.
• Replacing erase lamp unit (halogen lamp) • Cleaning reading unit It will go into the optical unit maintenance mode by pressing the operation switch and the erase switch simultaneously for more than 3 seconds when the equipment is in READY status.
Optical unit maintenance flow Clean up ScanUnit? 㨅㧦㨛㨜㨑㨞㨍㨠㨕㨛㨚 㧺㧦㨑㨞㨍㨟㨑 To clean the optical unit
To replace the lamp
Press «operation» Switch
Press «erase» Switch Change Halogen Lamp? 㨅㧦㨛㨜㨑㨞㨍㨠㨕㨛㨚 㧺㧦㨑㨞㨍㨟㨑 To replace the lamp
To cancel
Press «operation» Switch
Press «erase» Switch
ScanUnit MAINTENANCE PREPARING (Optical unit moves to second front side) ScanUnit MAINTENANCE PREPARATION FINISH Door Open
Door Open
Perform Optical Unit Cleaning
Perform Lamp Replacement
Door Close
Door Close Did you change lamp? 㨅㧦㨛㨜㨑㨞㨍㨠㨕㨛㨚 㧺㧦㨑㨞㨍㨟㨑 When the lamp was replaced When the lamp was not replaced Press «operation» Switch (Reset the counter)
㧵㧺㧵㨀㧵㧭㧸㧵㨆㧵㧺㧳 غغغغغععععع
㧾㧱㧭㧰㨅
2-30
Press «erase» Switch
0902YG220.book
31 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.7
Handling the Cassette Please be familiar with the following cautions when handling the REGIUS cassettes (RC-110 series).
Maintaining the image quality • • • • •
Be cautious no scratch or foreign object goes on the read surface of the plate. If you find any foreign object on the plate read surface, immediately clean it. Use a glove when handling a plate, just as handling the film. Do not expose the plate to the sun light. When you work on the plate under a fluorescent light in situation like cleaning, do it as fast as possible, and return it to the cassette as soon as it is completed. • Do not scratch or smudge the front plate.
Transportation/storage • Please follow following specification for temperature and humidity. • Temperature: Before opening the plate: 10 ~ 40°C • Humidity:
After opening the plate: 10 ~ 30°C 80% RH or less (no condensation)
• Do not expose to radiation such as X-ray, γ-ray, etc. • Place it so the cassette will be horizontal when transporting or storing in the original box. The back • • • •
plate may distort when the cassette is placed vertically for long period or in high temperature. Always tore the opened plate in the cassette. Do not store with back plate and front plate separated. Especially, the back plate might warp when it is stored diagonally by itself. Do not drop or bump the cassette. Store the operational cassettes vertically in the rack as conventional cassettes.
Confirmation before inserting Confirm following before inserting the cassette to prevent the trouble of cassette transportation action in the REGIUS MODEL 110. • Confirm that the lock mechanism is normal, and there is no distortion or breakage. Do not insert the cassette with abnormality into the REGIUS MODEL 110. • Confirm that there is no foreign object, such as a paper, wedged on the memo clip on the back plate. • Confirm that there is no foreign object, such as clips, between the front plate and the back plate. • Confirm that there is no tape affixed on the back plate to ensure good absorption of the back plate to the absorption plate. • Confirm that barcode is not dirty. • Confirm that it is locked.
Disposal • Request a disposal to an authorized industrial waste disposal service when disposing. Follow the local regulations/rules regarding the disposal methods.
2-31
0902YG220.book
32 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
2.8
Tools, Measuring Devices, Jigs, Etc., Necessary for Service Following tools, measuring devices, and jigs are necessary when performing service on the REGIUS MODEL 110. Jigs/tools
Note
Phillips driver
Standard tools
Slotted tip driver Allen wrench Wrench Wire cutter Tray
Place the removed screws and parts.
Anti-static wrist band (grounding strap) Detach detection unit adjusting jig
• Adjustment block • Sensor status detection jig
Use to adjust the position of the detach detection roller/ sensor. Power for the sensor status detection jig is coming from the USB connector. Prepare power outlet to USB adapter when getting the power from the power outlet.
Press down size adjusting jig
Used to adjust the press down size of the push plate unit.
0.2 mm spacer (film)
Used to adjust the position after installing the shutter unit assembly.
Interlock release key Laser protection glasses
Compatible to laser light of 660 nm wavelength
Acoustic wave tension meter
Manufacturer: Gates Unitta Asia Product name: Sonic Belt Tension Meter Model: U-505 or U-507
Oscilloscope Ethernet cable Network hub
Used to temporary connect the REGIUS console and the REGIUS MODEL 110 when replacing the CF card. Use category 5e or above cable. Cross cable can also be used. Interface specification: RJ-45 connector 100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Grease gun
Used to grease up the LM guide. Model name: MG70
Glove
Used to replace the halogen lamp.
Vacuum cleaner (portable)
Used to clean the brush.
Rag
• Used to clean the magnet shaft. • Used to clean the cassette absorption plate. • Used to apply grease on the parts except the LM guide. • Used to clean the exterior of the equipment upon completion of the service.
Plastic sheet
Cover the light capacitor unit, so no dust will collect, when the optical unit is taken off.
Rag, cardboard, etc.
Cover the LM guide and magnet shaft when performing the replacement inside the equipment.
Maintenance PC
2-32
0902YG220.book
33 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 2 Before the Repair
Supplied Products Jigs/tools
Note
Alcohol
Used to clean the cassette absorption plate.
Grease (for LM guide)
AFC grease by THK
Grease (all parts except LM guide)
Multemp AC-D
Wiring band Snap ties
2-33
0902YG220.book
34 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 3
3
Troubleshooting How to respond to a trouble on the equipment is described here.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Workflow ……………………………………………………3-2 Description of the Error Codes and How to Respond…………………………………………………….3-5 Response to the Problems Not Displaying Error ………………………………………………………..3-32 How to Respond on Image Defect ……………….3-36
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.1
Workflow Following describes the flow of response when there is a problem with the equipment. Type of trouble
Flow of response
Trouble that displays an error message on the message display window
1. Check if there is a cassette inside the equipment and restart the equipment. See «3.1.1 Restore Operation (Page 3-3)». 2. Confirm if the error occurs again. 3. See «3.2 Description of the Error Codes and How to Respond (Page 3-5)» and perform the response.
When you can not respond Communicate the description of the condition (see « Information to Communicate») to the contact person.
Trouble that does not display an error message on the message display window
See «3.3 Response to the Problems Not Displaying Error (Page 3-32)» and perform the response.
• Eject the cassette as first priority if the cassette is still in the equipment.
When you can not respond Communicate the description of the condition (see « Information to Communicate») to the contact person.
Defect in the read image
See «3.4 How to Respond on Image Defect (Page 3-36)» and perform the response.
Information to Communicate Communicate following information, as precise as possible, when communicating the status of trouble to the contact. Logs
Collect the logs of the equipment from the REGIUS console for the equipment trouble.
Connection configuration of the site
JM internal/external n:m If any dedicated equipment such as 350 is connected IP address/subnet mask
• REGIUS MODEL 110 • JM • REGIUS console Restore information
Has it restored by opening and closing the second front door Did it need to turn OFF/ON the circuit breaker
Other, description
3-2
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.1.1
Restore Operation When the error occurs, confirm if the error recur after restarting the equipment. Hot to restart is described here.
1 2
Open the second front door. Eject the cassette if it is possible to eject the cassette. See the instruction manual on how to eject the cassette. When the push plate unit is not at the read position due to operational error in the transporter, eject the cassette by Step 6.
3
Close the second front door. Initialization will be performed. Initialization will be canceled if there is a fault in the sensors or if the cassette is not ejected, and an error will be displayed. If the error was resolved, it will be in «READY» status.
4 operation
Shutdown the equipment by pressing «operation» switch for more than 3 seconds.
erase
«operation» Switch
5
Turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker.
3-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
6
Eject the cassette if the cassette is still in the equipment. When the push plate is not at the read position
First Front Back Side
1. See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel. 2. Move the push plate to the read position by rotating A in the image (drive shaft holder). 3. Eject the cassette. See the instruction manual on how to eject the cassette. 4. See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and attach the first font back panel.
A
7 8
Turn ON the power supply circuit breaker. Press the «operation» switch. Equipment will start up and initialization will be performed.
3-4
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2
Description of the Error Codes and How to Respond 3.2.1
06000 ~ 06037: Justifier Motor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06000 06015
06001 06016
06002 06017
06003 06018
Description of the error I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06030 Justifier HP sensor error (when moving to HP) Justifier HP sensor did not go ON when the justifier guide was moving to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06031 Justifier motor control error (when moving to HP) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06032 Justifier HP sensor error (when moving to cassette fixing position) Justifier HP sensor did not go OFF when the justifier guide was moving to the cassette fixing position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06033 Justifier motor control error (when moving to cassette fixing position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving to the cassette fixing position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• • • • •
Justifier HP sensor Sensor wire: JP41 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier motor Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Justifier motor • Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU • • • • •
Justifier HP sensor Sensor wire: JP41 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier motor Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Justifier motor • Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
06004 06019
06034 Justifier motor control error (when moving to minute opening position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving to the minute opening position.
06005 06020
06035 Justifier motor control error (when moving to cassette fixing position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving to the minute opening position.
06006 06021
06036 Justifier HP sensor error (when moving to HP 2) Justifier HP sensor did not go ON when the justifier guide was moving from the cassette fixing position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06037 Justifier motor control error (when moving to HP 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving from the cassette fixing position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06007 06022
• • • • •
Justifier HP sensor Sensor wire: JP41 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier motor Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Justifier motor • Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
3-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06008
06023
06009
06024
06010 06025
06011
06026
Description of the error I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06038 Justifier HP sensor error (when moving to HP 3) Justifier HP sensor did not go ON when the justifier guide was moving from the minute opening position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06039 Justifier motor control error (when moving to HP 3) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving from the minute opening position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06040 Justifier HP sensor error (when moving to minute opening position) Justifier HP sensor did not go OFF when the justifier guide was moving from the home position to the minute opening position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06041 Justifier motor control error (when moving to minute opening position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the justifier guide was moving from the home position to the minute opening position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• • • • •
Justifier HP sensor Sensor wire: JP41 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier motor Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Justifier motor • Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
• • • • •
Justifier HP sensor Sensor wire: JP41 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier motor Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Justifier motor • Motor wire: JJ50 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.2 Receiver unit (Page 2-12)» for the position of the justifier motor and the justifier HP sensor.
• See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.4.1 Replacing the Justifier HP Sensor (Page 5-39)» for the procedure to replace the justifier HP sensor.
• See «5.4.3 Replacing the Justifier Motor (Page 5-41)» for the procedure to replace the justifier motor. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.2
06050 ~ 06090: Receiver Motor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06050 06065
Description of the error I 06080 Receiver HP sensor error (when moving to HP) Receiver HP sensor did not go ON when the receiver was moving to the home position.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• • • • •
Receiver HP sensor Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Receiver motor Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
06051 06066
06081 Receiver motor control error Confirm following and replace the faulty parts. (when moving to HP) • Receiver motor There was a trouble with the • Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) motor control when the receiver • MDU was moving to the home position.
06052 06067
06082 Receiver HP sensor error (when moving to first falling position) Receiver HP sensor did not go OFF when the receiver was moving from the home position to the first falling position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06083 Receiver motor control error (when moving to first falling position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving from the home position to the first falling position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06053 06068
06054 06069
06084 Receiver motor control error (when moving to second falling position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving from the first falling position to the second falling position.
06055 06070
06085 Receiver motor control error (when moving slightly down at the second falling position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving down slightly at the second falling position.
06056 06071
06086 Receiver motor control error (when moving to first falling position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving from the second falling position to the first falling position.
06057 06072
06087 Receiver HP sensor error (when moving to HP 2) Receiver HP sensor did not go ON when the receiver was moving from the first falling position to the home position.
• • • • •
Receiver HP sensor Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Receiver motor Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Receiver motor • Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• • • • •
Receiver HP sensor Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Receiver motor Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
3-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06058 06073
06059 06074
06060 06075
06061
06062
06076
06077
Description of the error I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06088 Receiver motor control error (when moving to HP 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving from the first falling position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06089 Receiver HP sensor error (when moving to HP 3) Receiver HP sensor did not go ON when the receiver was moving from the second falling position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06090 Receiver motor control error (when moving to HP 3) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving from the second falling position to the home position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06091 Receiver HP sensor error (when moving to second falling position) Receiver HP sensor did not go OFF when the receiver was moving from the home position to the second falling position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06092 Receiver motor control error (when moving to second falling position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the receiver was moving from the home position to the second falling position.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Receiver motor • Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
• • • • •
Receiver HP sensor Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Receiver motor Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Receiver motor • Motor wire: JP51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
• • • • •
Receiver HP sensor Sensor wire: JP43 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Receiver motor Motor wire: JJ51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) MDU
• Receiver motor • Motor wire: JJ51 ~ MCN5 (MDU) • MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.2 Receiver unit (Page 2-12)» for the position of the receiver motor and the receiver HP sensor.
• See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.4.6 Replacing the Receiver HP Sensor (Page 5-47)» for the procedure to replace the receiver HP sensor. • See «5.4.7 Replacing the Receiver Motor (Page 5-48)» for the procedure to replace the receiver motor. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-8
0902YG220.book
9 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.3
06100 ~ 06143: Transporter Motor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06100
06115
Description of the error I 06130 Transporter read sensor error (when moving to read position) Transporter read sensor did not go ON when the push plate unit was moving to the read position.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Tumbler (if the spring is not broken)
• Transporter read sensor • Sensor wire: JP47 ~ MCN4 (MDU) • Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU 06101
06116
06131 Transporter motor control error (when moving to read position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving to the read position.
1. Confirm the ground. (It may cause noise) 2. Confirm that the antistatic brush right under the insertion slot has not fallen off. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Ground wire of transporter unit (if it is not broken) • Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU
06102
06117
06132 Transporter read sensor error (when moving to HP) Transporter read sensor did not go OFF when the push plate unit was moving to the home position.
1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Transporter read sensor • Sensor wire: JP47 ~ MCN4 (MDU)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU
3-9
0902YG220.book
10 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06103
06118
Description of the error I 06133 Transporter HP sensor error (when moving to HP) Transporter HP sensor did not go ON when the push plate unit was moving from the read position to the home position.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Transporter HP Sensor • Sensor wire: JP46 ~ MCN4 (MDU)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU)
• MDU 06104
06119
06134 Transporter motor control error (when moving to HP) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving from the read position to the home position.
1. Confirm the ground. (It may cause noise) 2. Confirm that the antistatic brush right under the insertion slot has not fallen off. 3. Confirm following, and replace faulty parts:
• Ground wire of transporter unit (if it is not broken)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU 06105 06120
06135 Transporter HP sensor error (when moving to press down position) Transporter HP sensor did not go OFF when the push plate unit was moving from the home position to the press down position.
1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Transporter HP sensor • Sensor wire: JP46 ~ MCN4 (MDU)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU)
• MDU
3-10
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06106 06121
06107 06122
Description of the error I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06136 Transporter motor control error (when moving to press down position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving from the home position to the press down position.
1. Confirm the ground. (It may cause noise) 2. Confirm that the antistatic brush right under the insertion slot has not fallen off. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
06137 Transporter read sensor error (when moving to read position 2) Transporter read sensor did not go ON when the push plate unit was moving from the press down position to the read position.
1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Ground wire of transporter unit (if it is not broken) • Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU
• Transporter read sensor • Sensor wire: JP47 ~ MCN4 (MDU)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU 06108 06123
06138 Transporter motor control error (when moving to read position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving from the press down position to the read position.
1. Confirm the ground. (It may cause noise) 2. Confirm that the antistatic brush right under the insertion slot has not fallen off. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Ground wire of transporter unit (if it is not broken) • Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU
3-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06109 06124
Description of the error I 06139 Transporter read sensor error (when moving to press down position 2) Transporter read sensor did not go OFF when the push plate unit was moving from the read position to the press down position.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Transporter read sensor • Sensor wire: JP47 ~ MCN4 (MDU)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU)
• MDU 06110
06125
06140 Transporter motor control error (when moving to press down position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving from the read position to the press down position.
06111
06126
06141 Transporter motor control error (when moving to HP pass position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving from the read position to the HP pass position.
06112
06127
06142 Transporter HP sensor error (when moving to HP 2) Transporter HP sensor did not go ON when the push plate unit was moving from the HP pass position to the home position, when it was trying to move from the press down position to the home position.
1. Confirm the ground. (It may cause noise) 2. Confirm that the antistatic brush right under the insertion slot has not fallen off. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Ground wire of transporter unit (if it is not broken)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU 1. Confirm that there are no foreign objects between the push plate and the frame, and remove if there are any. 2. Confirm if there is enough grease on the drive shaft, nut, or transporter motor unit, and apply grease if it is not enough. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Transporter HP sensor • Sensor wire: JP46 — MCN4 (MDU)
• Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 — MCN6 (MDU) • MDU
3-12
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06113
06128
Description of the error I 06143 Transporter motor control error (when moving to HP 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the push plate unit was moving from the HP pass position to the home position, when it was trying to move from the press down position to the home position.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Confirm the ground. (It may cause noise) 2. Confirm that the antistatic brush right under the insertion slot has not fallen off. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Ground wire of transporter unit (if it is not broken) • Transporter motor • Motor wire: JP52 ~ MCN6 (MDU) • MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.3 Transporter Unit (Page 2-13)» for the positions of push plate and tumbler. • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the transporter motor, the transporter read sensor, the transporter HP sensor, and the MDU.
• See «7.2.8 Greasing Transporter Lead Screw Unit and Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Unit (Page 7-12)» for applying grease to the transporter motor unit.
• See «5.10.5 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor (Page 5-128)» for the procedure to replace the transporter read sensor.
• See «5.10.4 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor (Page 5-127)» for the procedure to replace the transporter HP sensor.
• See «5.10.6 Replacing the Transporter Motor (Page 5-129)» for the procedure to replace the transporter motor.
• See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3.2.4
06150 ~ 06182: Subscan Motor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06150 06165
Description of the error
Response
I 06180 Encoder initialization error Initialization of the encoder has failed.
1. Confirm that the fixing shaft of the simple fixing lock is not lowered. 2. Confirm there are no foreign objects on the magnet shaft of the subscan unit, and remove it if there are any. 3. Confirm that it is installed horizontally. 4. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Encoder • Encoder wire: CN4 (LMC) • LMC
3-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
Description of the error I
06151 06166
06181 Subscan motor control error (when moving to mechanical HP) There was a trouble with the motor control when the subscan was moving from the home position to the mechanical home position.
06152 06167
06182 Transporter motor control error (when moving to read end position) There was a trouble with the motor control when the subscan was moving from the mechanical home position to the read end position.
06153 06168
Response
1. Confirm that the fixing shaft of the simple fixing lock is not lowered. 2. Confirm there are no foreign objects on the magnet shaft of the subscan unit, and remove it if there are any. 3. Confirm that it is installed horizontally. 4. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Subscan motor (cannot replace on-site)
• Motor wire: CN2 (LMD) • LMD • LMC
06183 Subscan motor control error (when moving to mechanical home position 2) There was a trouble with the motor control when the subscan was moving from the read end position to the mechanical home position.
References for response method • • • • •
3-14
See «2.5.4 Subscan Unit (Page 2-14)» for the position of the encoder and the subscan motor. See «2.5.5 Optical Unit/Eraser Unit (Page 2-15)» for the position of the LMD and the LMC. See «5.5.3 Replacing the Encoder/Wires (Page 5-67)» for the procedure to replace the encoder. See «5.6.1 Replacing the LMD (Page 5-78)» for the procedure to replace the LMD. See «5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)» for the procedure to replace the LMC.
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.5
06200 ~ 06231: Insertion ShutterMotor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
Description of the error I
06200 06215
06230 Insertion shutter open error There was a trouble with the motor control for the opening action of the insertion shutter.
06201 06216
06231 Insertion shutter close error There was a trouble with the motor control for the closing action of the insertion shutter.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Confirm there are no foreign objects in the shutter unit, and remove it if there are any. 2. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Shutter unit (if it is not deformed)
• Shutter open detection sensor • Sensor wire: JP35 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Shutter close detection sensor • Sensor wire: JP36 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• ShutterMotor • Motor wire: JP20 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• MDU References for response method • See «2.5.1 Insertion Unit (Page 2-11)» for the position of the ShutterMotor, the shutter open detection sensor, and the shutter close detection sensor.
• See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.3.12 Replacing the Shutter Unit (Page 5-35)» for the method to replace the shutter unit. • See «5.3.9 Replacing the Shutter Open Detection Sensor (Page 5-31)» for the procedure to replace the shutter open detection sensor. • See «5.3.10 Replacing the Shutter Close Detection Sensor (Page 5-33)» for the procedure to replace the shutter close detection sensor. • See «5.3.11 Replacing the Shutter Motor (Page 5-34)» for the procedure to replace the ShutterMotor. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.6
06250 ~ 06282: Lock Release Motor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06250 06265
Description of the error I 06280 Lock release motor error (when initializing) There was a trouble with the motor control for the initialization action of the lock unit.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Check the sliding of the release rod (plunger pin), and replace the release pin unit assembly when it does not slide smoothly. 2. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Lock HP sensor • Sensor wire: JP45 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• Lock Motor • Motor wire: JP16 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• MDU 06251 06266
06281 Lock release motor error (when locking) There was a trouble with the motor control for the lock action of the lock unit.
06252 06267
06282 Lock release motor error (when releasing) There was a trouble with the motor control for the lock release action of the lock unit.
1. Confirm the status of how the cassette is set. (is the cassette set in correct orientation) 2. Check the sliding of the release rod (plunger pin), and replace the release pin unit assembly when it does not slide smoothly. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Lock HP sensor • Sensor wire: JP45 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• Lock Motor • Motor wire: JP16 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• MDU References for response method • See «2.5.2 Receiver unit (Page 2-12)» for the position of the Lock Motor and the lock HP sensor. • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.4.8 Replacing the Lock HP Sensor (Page 5-51)» for the procedure to replace the lock HP sensor.
• See «5.4.9 Replacing the Lock Motor (Page 5-52)» for the procedure to replace the Lock Motor. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-16
0902YG220.book
17 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.7
06300 ~ 06333: Justifier Sensor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06300 06315
Description of the error I 06330 Justifier sensor error (during fixing action) Both justifier sensor and justifier standard sensor did not go ON right after the cassette fixing action.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) «06300» or «06315» may appear, depending on how you inserted the cassette. For more information, see «3.3.5 Faulty operation by users (Page 3-35)». 1. Confirm that there are no scratches or foreign objects on the cassette, the receiver, and the justifier guide. Replace with new parts if there are any scratches, or remove any foreign objects. 2. Confirm if the adjustment of the justifier motor is appropriate, and adjust it if it is out of range. 3. Confirm that there is no rattling or loosening in the pulley or the gear unit of the justifier motor unit, and remount the unit if there is any rattling or loosening.
Justifier Motor C B
A A: Confirm that there is rattling (backlash) on the timing belt by moving it left and right. B: Confirm that the fixing screw of the pulley is not loose. C: Confirm that the shaft does not move left and right. (should be less than 0.2 mm) 4. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Justifier standard sensor • Sensor wire: JP44 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• Justifier sensor • Sensor wire: JP40 ~ JJ18/JP18 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• MDU
3-17
0902YG220.book
18 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06301 06316
Description of the error I 06331 Justifier sensor error (during fixing action) Justifier sensor or justifier standard sensor went OFF during the fixing of the cassette.
06302 06317 06332
Cassette during the startup (justifier sensor) Justifier sensor or justifier standard sensor was ON during the initialization by PowerON.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• • • •
Justifier standard sensor Sensor wire: JP44 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier sensor Sensor wire: JP40 ~ JJ18/JP18 ~ MCN3 (MDU) • MDU 1. Confirm for foreign object inside the equipment, and remove it if there is any. 2. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Justifier standard sensor • Sensor wire: JP44 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• Justifier sensor • Sensor wire: JP40 ~ JJ18/JP18 ~ MCN3 (MDU) • MDU 06303 06318
06333 Cassette during the initialization (justifier sensor) Justifier sensor or justifier standard sensor was ON during the initialization after closing the second front door.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• • • •
Justifier standard sensor Sensor wire: JP44 ~ MCN3 (MDU) Justifier sensor Sensor wire: JP40 ~ JJ18/JP18 ~ MCN3 (MDU) • MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.2 Receiver unit (Page 2-12)» for the position of the receiver, the justifier guide, the justifier motor, the justifier standard sensor, and the justifier sensor.
• See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «6.3 Adjustment of Justifier Motor (Page 6-6)» for the confirmation and adjustment methods for the amount of justification.
• See «5.4.13 Replacing the Justifier Belt (Page 5-60)» for the method to mount the pulley and the gear unit for the justifier motor.
• See «5.4.4 Replacing the Justifier Standard Sensor (Page 5-43)» for the procedure to replace the justifier standard sensor.
• See «5.4.2 Replacing the Justifier Sensor (Page 5-40)» for the procedure to replace the justifier sensor.
• See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-18
0902YG220.book
19 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.8
06350 ~ 06385: Receiver Sensor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
Description of the error
E
I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06350 06365
06380 Receiver sensor error (when receiving cassette) Receiver sensor did not go ON when receiving the cassette.
«06350» or «06365» may appear, depending on how you inserted the cassette. For more information, see «3.3.5 Faulty operation by users (Page 3-35)».
06351 06366
06381 Receiver sensor error (when moving cassette) Receiver sensor went OFF when moving the cassette.
06352 06367
06382 Receiver sensor error (when ejecting cassette) Receiver sensor went OFF when ejecting the cassette.
06353 06368
06383 Receiver sensor error (when removing cassette) Receiver sensor did not go OFF after removing the cassette.(Insertion slot detection sensor is OFF)
1. Confirm that there are no scratches or foreign objects on the cassette, the receiver, and the justifier guide. Replace with new parts if there are any scratches, or remove any foreign objects. 2. Confirm that the sensor dog on the receiver sensor is not deformed, and replace it if there is any deformation. 3. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Receiver sensor • Sensor wire: JP42 ~ JJ17/JP17 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• MDU 06354
Cassette during the startup (receiver) Receiver sensor was ON during the initialization by PowerON.
06355 06370
06385 Cassette during the initialization (receiver) Receiver sensor was ON during the initialization after closing the second front door.
1. Confirm for foreign object inside the equipment, and remove it if there is any. 2. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Receiver sensor • Sensor wire: JP42 ~ JJ17/JP17 ~ MCN3 (MDU)
• MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.2 Receiver unit (Page 2-12)» for the position of the receiver, the justifier guide, and the receiver sensor.
• See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.4.10 Replacing the Receiver (Receiver Unit Assembly) (Page 5-53)» for the method to replace the receiver.
• See «5.4.11 Replacing the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly (Page 5-55)» for the method to replace the justifier guide.
• See «5.4.5 Replacing the Receiver Sensor (Page 5-45)» for the procedure to replace the receiver sensor.
• See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-19
0902YG220.book
20 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.9
06400 ~ 06432: Back Plate Detection Sensor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
Description of the error
E
06400 06415
I 06430 Back plate detection sensor error (before moving to read position) Back plate absorption detection sensor was ON before moving the push plate to the read position after separating the cassette.
06401 06416
06431 Back plate detection sensor error (when stopped at read position) Back plate absorption detection sensor was OFF when the push plate is at the read position after separating the cassette.
06402 06417
06432 Back plate detection sensor error (after moving to press down position) Back plate absorption detection sensor was ON after moving the push plate to the press down position after separating the cassette.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Back plate absorption detection sensor
• Sensor wire: JP48 ~ MCN4 (MDU) • MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the back plate absorption detection sensor and the MDU.
• See «5.10.7 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor (Page 5-132)» for the procedure to replace the back plate absorption detection sensor.
• See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-20
0902YG220.book
21 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.10 06450 ~ 06483: Detach Detection Sensor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06450 06465
06451 06466
Description of the error I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06480 Plate detach detection (when reading or erasing) Detach detection sensor went ON during the read action or the erase action.
• Stop using the cassette with an error,
06481 Detach detection sensor error (when not operating) Detach detection sensor went ON when the read action or the erase action is not performing.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
and request a repair at the factory.
• If same error occurs with multiple cassettes, adjust the position of the detach detection roller and the detach detection sensor.
• Detach detection sensor • Sensor wire (top): JP54 ~ ACN6 (LMC)
• Sensor wire (bottom): JP55 ~ ACN6 (LMC)
• LMC 06452
Detach detection sensor error (during startup) Detach detection sensor was ON during the initialization by PowerON.
06453 06468
06483 Detach detection sensor error (during initialization) Detach detection sensor was ON during the initialization after closing the second front door.
1. Confirm for foreign object inside the equipment, and remove it if there is any. 2. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Detach detection sensor • Sensor wire (top): JP54 ~ ACN6 (LMC)
• Sensor wire (bottom): JP55 ~ ACN6 (LMC)
• LMC References for response method • See «2.5.6 Detach Detection Unit (Page 2-16)» for the position of the detach detection sensors. • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.8.1 Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Upper) (Page 5-88)» or «5.8.2 Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Lower) (Page 5-89)»for the procedure to replace the detach detection sensors. • See «5.8.3 Replacing the Detach Detection Roller (Page 5-91)» for the procedure to replace the detach detection roller. • See «5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)» for the procedure to replace the LMC.
3-21
0902YG220.book
22 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.11 06500 ~ 06534: Insertion Slot Detection Sensor Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
06500 06515
Description of the error I 06530 Insertion slot detection sensor error (when initializing) One or more of the insertion slot detection sensor 1, the insertion slot detection sensor 2, or the back plate drop detection sensor was not OFF when initializing the cassette (before opening the shutter).
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Confirm there are no foreign objects in the sensor hole of the insertion slot, and remove it if there are any. 2. Confirm following and replace the faulty parts. (sensor may be soiled)
• Insert slot detection sensor 1 • Sensor wire (LLB2): JP32 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Sensor wire (LPB2): JP34 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Insert slot detection sensor 2 • Sensor wire (LLB1): JP31 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Sensor wire (LPB1): JP33 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Back plate drop detection sensor • Sensor wire: JP37 ~ MCN1 (MDU) • MDU 06501
06502
3-22
06516
06517
06531 Insertion slot detection sensor error (when loading cassette) One or more of the insertion slot detection sensor 1 or the insertion detection sensor 2 was not OFF when loading the cassette (from dropping to the second falling position to shutter close). 06532 Insertion slot detection sensor error (when ejecting cassette) One or more of the insertion slot detection sensor 1, the insertion detection sensor 2, or the back plate drop detection sensor was not OFF when ejecting the cassette (after opening shutter).
Confirm the following, and replace faulty parts:
• Insertion slot detection sensor 1 • Sensor wire (LLB2): • • • • • • •
JP32 ~ MCN1 (MDU) Sensor wire (LPB2): JP34 ~ MCN1 (MDU) Insertion slot detection sensor 2 Sensor wire (LLB1): JP31 ~ MCN1 (MDU) Sensor wire (LPB1): JP33 ~ MCN1 (MDU) Back plate drop detection sensor Sensor wire: JP37 ~ MCN1 (MDU) MDU
0902YG220.book
23 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code S
E
06503 06518
Description of the error I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06533 Cassette back plate drop When the back plate is off detection Back plate drop detection sensor 1. Check the cassette. was OFF (drop detected) after • Are there any clicks when lock the insertion slot detection unit is pushed? sensor went ON during the eject. • Is the manufacturing date of the cassette correct? (You can not use the ones before April 2004.) 2. If there was no problem with the cassette, check the operation of the equipment and determine the reason that it could not lock and respond accordingly. (Confirm the pressing amount of the push plate unit too) When the back plate is not off Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Roller on the insertion slot (if it is not deformed)
• Back plate drop detection sensor • Sensor wire: JP37 ~ MCN1 (MDU) • MDU 06504
06519
06534 Insertion slot detection sensor error (when ejecting cassette 2) Insertion slot detection sensor 1 and insertion slot detection sensor 2 were both OFF when ejecting the cassette.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts.
• Insert slot detection sensor 1 • Sensor wire (LLB2): JP32 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Sensor wire (LPB2):
JP34 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Insert slot detection sensor 2 • Sensor wire (LLB1): JP31 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• Sensor wire (LPB1):
JP33 ~ MCN1 (MDU)
• MDU References for response method • See «2.5.1 Insertion Unit (Page 2-11)» for the position of the insertion detection sensor 1, the insertion detection sensor 2, and the back plate drop detection sensor.
• See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.3.7 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) (Page 5-27)» and «5.3.7 Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) (Page 5-27)» for the procedure to replace the insertion detection sensor 1, the insertion detection sensor 2, and the back plate drop detection sensor. • See «5.3.6 Replacing the Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor (Page 5-26)» for the procedure to replace the back plate drop detection sensor. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU. • See «6.6 Adjustment of Pressing Amount (Page 6-15)» for the confirmation and adjustment method of the pressing amount of the push plate unit.
3-23
0902YG220.book
24 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.12 06550 : Optical Unit/Eraser Unit Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code
Description of the error
S
E
I
06550
—
—
Polygon rotation error Rotation of the polygon was not stable when the push plate unit moved to the read position.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) Replace the optical unit.
References for response method • See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
3.2.13 06601 ~ 06603: Fan Error Error code
Description of the error
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06601
Eraser cooling fan blowout Fan blowout was detected when the cooling fan tried to turn.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts. • Eraser cooling fan • Fan wire: JJ19 ~ MCN1 (MDU) • MDU
06602
Digital power supply cooling fan blowout Fan blowout was detected when the cooling fan tried to turn.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts. • Digital power supply cooling fan • Fan wire: JJ49 ~ JP11/JJ11 ~ MCN9 (MDU) • MDU
06603
MDU cooling fan blowout Fan blowout was detected when the cooling fan tried to turn.
Confirm following and replace the faulty parts. • MDU cooling fan • MDU
References for response method • See «2.5.1 Insertion Unit (Page 2-11)» for the position of the eraser cooling fan. • See «2.5.7 Exterior (Page 2-17)» for the position of the digital power supply cooling fan. • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.3.3 Replacing the Eraser Cooling Fan (Page 5-22)» for the procedure to replace the eraser cooling fan.
• See «5.9.14 Replacing the Digital Power Supply Cooling Fan (Page 5-117)» for the procedure to replace the digital power supply cooling fan.
• See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3-24
0902YG220.book
25 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.14 06650 ~ 06683: FPGA Errors • Error codes S column: Errors at the read operation/calibration. • Error codes E column: Errors during erase operation. • Error codes I column: Errors during initialization. Error code S
E
I
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
06650
FPGA error (failure on event driver access) Failed on event driver access.
Confirm the following when it recurs. 1. Replace only the CIU and confirm the operation. (Especially around the high-speed serial cable) 2. After backuping the circuit board data, replace both CIU and CF card, restore the circuit board data, and confirm the operation.
06651
FPGA error (failure on access to MDU) Failed to access the MDU.
Confirm the following when it recurs. 1. Confirm the connectors around the MDU and the CIU. (Especially around the high-speed serial cable) 2. Replace the MDU circuit board (mechanism control circuit board) and confirm the operation.
06652
FPGA error (failure on access to LMC) Failed to access the LMC.
Confirm the following when it recurs. 1. Confirm the connectors around the LMC and the CIU. (Especially around the high-speed serial cable) 2. Replace the LMC circuit board (optical/ subscan control circuit board) and confirm the operation.
06655
FPGA error (failure on access to PMU) Failed to access the PMU.
Confirm the following when it recurs. 1. Confirm the connectors around the PMU and the LMC. (Especially around the high-speed serial cable) 2. Replace the PMU circuit board (photomultiplier tube filter assy) and confirm the operation.
06653 06668
06654
Description of the error
—
06683 FPGA error (failed on I/O control) Failed on IOCTL (I/O control) during access to the FPGA.
—
FPGA error (failed to open image driver) Failed to open the image driver when transferring the image.
Confirm the following when it recurs. 1. After backuping the circuit board data, replace only the CIU and confirm the operation. 2. Replace both CIU and CF card, restore the circuit board data, and confirm the operation. Confirm the following when it recurs. 1. After backuping the circuit board data, replace only the CIU and confirm the operation. 2. Replace both CIU and CF card, restore the circuit board data, and confirm the operation.
3-25
0902YG220.book
26 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
References for response method • See «5.10.1 Replacing the CIU (Page 5-121)» for the procedure to replace the CIU. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU. • See «5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)» for the procedure to replace the LMC. • See «5.6.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy (Page 5-81)» for the procedure to replace the photomultiplier tube filter assy.
• See «5.10.3 Replacing the CF Card (Page 5-124)» for the procedure to replace the CF card.
3-26
0902YG220.book
27 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.15 14000 ~ 15000: Signal Process Errors Error code
Description of the error
14000
Signal process error – Gain Overflow Gain value has overflowed in the gain/offset compensation process during the PowerON/ Wakeup.
14001
Signal process error – Gain Underflow Gain value has underflowed in the gain/offset compensation process during the PowerON/ Wakeup.
14002
Signal process error – Offset Overflow Offset value has overflowed in the gain/offset compensation process during the PowerON/ Wakeup.
14003
Signal process error – Offset Underflow Offset value has underflowed in the gain/offset compensation process during the PowerON/ Wakeup.
14010
Signal process error – QRV Overflow PMT high voltage setup value has exceeded the operation guarantee voltage during the sensitivity calibration.
14011
Signal process error – QRV Underflow PMT high voltage setup value is lower than the operation guarantee voltage during the sensitivity calibration.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) If the error occurs again, replace the PMU circuits (Photomultiplier tube filter assy) and confirm the operation.
Confirm the following when it recur. 1. Confirm that there is no mistake in exposure X-ray condition and the service tool input dosage. (There is a possibility that the exposure dosage is too small) 2. Replace the cassette and confirm the operation. 3. Confirm the connectors around the PMT and the LMC.
References for response method • See «2.5.5 Optical Unit/Eraser Unit (Page 2-15)» for the position of the LMC. • See «5.6.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy (Page 5-81)» for the procedure to replace photomultiplier tube filter assy.
• See «5.10.3 Replacing the CF Card (Page 5-124)» for the procedure to replace the CF card.
3-27
0902YG220.book
28 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.16 23000 ~ 23900: Program Errors Error code
Description of the error
23000
Program error – Main control Network control program has detected a problem in the system call including the device I/O.
Confirm the following when it recur.
Program error – Data file size In the operation of the maintenance mode, the size of the data that was sent from the console was different from the prescribed size.
Confirm the following when it recur.
Program error – Firmware update Problem in data included in the Update-Kit for updating the reader firm. (This error is displayed only on the console.)
Confirm that the Update-Kit is for the REGIUS MODEL 110 and it is not corrupted, then perform the update again after replacing the CF card.
23200
23900
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) 1. Replace only the CIU and confirm the operation. 2. Replace both CIU and CF card, restore the circuit data, and confirm the operation.
1. If there is a backup from before the problem, restore the circuit board data, after confirming normal startup after replacing the CF card.
References for response method • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the MDU. • See «5.10.3 Replacing the CF Card (Page 5-124)» for the procedure to replace the CF card. • See «5.10.2 Replacing the MDU (Page 5-122)» for the procedure to replace the MDU.
3.2.17 24000 ~ 25200: Network Errors Error code 24000
Description of the error
Network error – JM connection 1. The connection between the equipment and the JM was not established because the JM has not started. 2. The connection between the equipment and the JM was not established because there was problem with the network environment such as malfunction of the cable or the HUB. 3. The connection between the equipment and the JM was not established because there was a problem with the network setup of the console or the reader.
3-28
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) Confirm in following order: 1. Confirm the startup of the JM (internal/external console). 2. Confirm malfunction or power outage of the network hubs or disconnection of the Ethernet cables. 3. Confirm the network settings of the console, the reader, and the JM (see Install and Maintenance Manual for the console).
0902YG220.book
29 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of the error
25000
Network error – Non-timeout Network control program has detected a problem in the system call related to the network I/F.
25100
Network error – Timeout (during normal communication) Data transmission to the console, mainly during operation of the maintenance mode, has timed out.
25200
Network error – Timeout (during image transfer) Image transmission to the console, mainly during the image read operation in routine mode, has timed out.
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.) Confirm in following order: 1. Confirm if the console in communication is operating normally. 2. Confirm that there is no malfunction of the network hub between the equipment and the console, power outage, or disconnection of the Ethernet cable. 3. Confirm the network setup on the console, reader, and JM (see Install/Maintenance Manual for the console). 4. Replace only the CIU and confirm the operation. 5. Replace both CIU and CF card, restore the circuit data, and confirm the operation.
References for response method • See «2.5.8 Framework (Page 2-19)» for the position of the CIU. • See «5.10.3 Replacing the CF Card (Page 5-124)» for the procedure to replace the CF card. • See «5.10.1 Replacing the CIU (Page 5-121)» for the procedure to replace the CIU.
3.2.18 26000 ~ 26900: Operation Errors Error code
Description of the error
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
26000
Operation error – Invalid job There was an unsupported command in the job searched from JM. (This error is displayed on the console only)
Install the most current reader firm and console application with matching versions.
26010
Operation error – Invalid job parameter The job searched from JM included a command parameter that is not compatible. (This error is displayed on the console only)
26100
Operation error – Out of mode job The job searched from the JM was not executable with any of the operation mode of the equipment. (This error is displayed on the console only)
If this error occurred on the startup after powering OFF the reader while it was sleeping, it should operate without any problem. In any other cases, confirm that the settings of the JM are correct (see Install/Maintenance Manual for the console).
26200
Operation error – Invalid console During the maintenance mode, there was an operation request from a console that is not performing the maintenance. (This error is displayed on the console only)
It will operate without any problems. When the reader is under maintenance, it will not accept the operation request from other consoles.
3-29
0902YG220.book
30 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3-30
Error code
Description of the error
Response (References to replacement methods are listed at the end of the table.)
26300
Operation error – Reader Busy The operation request from the console was not executable because the cassette was inserted at the same time as the operation request from the console was received. (This error is displayed only on the console.)
Operation will continue without any problems. Perform the operation on the console again after the cassette is ejected.
26900
Operation error – PowerOFF during job execution PowerOFF was executed by pressing the «operation» switch right after the job search from the JM. (This error is displayed only on the console.)
Operation will continue without any problems. Perform the operation on the console again after starting up the reader that was powered OFF.
0902YG220.book
31 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.2.19 Confirm the H-sync Signal (To be stated)
3-31
0902YG220.book
32 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.3
Response to the Problems Not Displaying Error Problems whose error codes do not appear are classified as follows, and are covered in this section.
• • • • •
3.3.1
Network Related Power ON/OFF Related Signal processing related (control/error) A strange noise from the device Faulty operation by users
Network Related This table shows how to handle the network errors whose codes do not appear. Phenomenon Does not synchronize the REGIUS console when it starts or stops
Response
• Confirm that the reader is not turned off. • Confirm that the relation table for JM is correctly set. (See the Installation and Service Manual for the console.) • Confirm that no readers and consoles that do not exist in the system are registered in the r_status and c_status tables for JM. (See the Installation and Service Manual for the console.)
Synchronizes the REGIUS console but only fails in scanning images
Confirm that the target console is correctly set to the hosts file for the reader. (See the Installation and Service Manual for the console.)
A registered error appears on the LCD.
• Confirm that settings for the console are consistent with those on the sys_config table for JM in terms of pre- and pro-registration methods. (See the Installation and Service Manual for the console.) • Confirm that JM connected to the console is the same as that connected to the reader. (See the Installation and Service Manual for the console.)
Various network errors occur sporadically.
3.3.2
• Confirm that elements such as network cable or HUB between devices are not broken. • Confirm that there is no device that has duplicate IP addresses in the system.
Power ON/OFF Related This table shows how to handle power-related errors whose codes do not appear. Phenomenon
3-32
Response
Nothing operates when «operation» switch is pressed. («operation» lamp does not turn on)
See « Analysis Procedure of Power Supply Problems (Cannot Turn ON the Power Supply) (page 3-33)».
Does not stop even if the operation switch is pressed.
Turn off, and then on the power supply circuit breaker for the main unit. Press the operation switch to confirm whether it starts.
0902YG220.book
33 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Analysis Procedure of Power Supply Problems (Cannot Turn ON the Power Supply) When the power does not go ON by pressing the «operation» switch, confirm from top of the next table, and respond accordingly. (See next page for the position of each parts.) No.
Confirm
Possible fault location for no output*
1
Connect the power cable to the outlet, and confirm that there are specified voltage on the plug on other side.
Power cable
2
Confirm that second front door is closed.
Close the second front door.
3
Confirm that the position of the interlock switch (SW1) is adjusted.
Adjust the position.
4
If above is normal, confirm that the resistance between the contacts is open on the interlock switch (SW1) when the second front door is closed.
Interlock switch (SW1)
Measuring point: JJ10-1 pin ~ 2 pin 5
Confirm that the resistance between the contacts is open on the «operation» switch while the «operation» switch is pressed.
OPB
Measuring point: MCN2-1 pin ~ 10 pin 6
Confirm that AC 110 — 120 V is output on the secondary connector of the transformer (JJ2 and JJ3) after turning ON the power supply circuit breaker. Measuring point: JJ2-1 pin ~ 2 pin JJ3-1 pin ~ 2 pin
7
Confirm that standby power supply is supplied to the MDU power supply connector after turning ON the power supply circuit breaker.
• AC inlet • Power supply circuit breaker (SW2) • Noise filter (NF1) • Transformer (PT1) • Wrong tap connected to the transformer Standby Power supply (SUP2)
Measuring point: MCN7 — 1 pin = 5 V ~ 2 pin = 0 V 8
Confirm the power supply control output from the MDU while pressing the «operation» switch after turning ON the power supply circuit breaker. Measuring point: CN3 -1
9
MDU if it is 5 V
pin 0 V
Confirm the output from the PCU while pressing the «operation» switch after turning ON the power supply circuit breaker.
PCU
Measuring point: PCN2 — 1 pin ~ 5 pin = AC 110 — 120 V 10
Confirm the that there is normal output from the SUP1 (JP25) while pressing the «operation» switch after turning ON the power supply circuit breaker.
Digital power supply (SUP1)
Measuring point: JP253 pin = 24 V ~ 2 pin = 0 V 4 pin = 24 V ~ 2 pin = 0 V 7 pin = 5 V ~ 6 pin = 0 V 8 pin = 5 V ~ 6 pin = 0 V 11
When all above are normal
MDU
*: Only circuit board and power supply is described for faulty parts. Confirm the wiring too.
3-33
0902YG220.book
34 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
First Front Side
JJ3
JP25
PCU JJ2 PCN2
Noise Filter Interlock Switch AC Inlet
JJ10
Tap Digital Power Standby Power Power Supply Supply Breaker Transformer Supply
First Front Side Back
MCN7
CN3 MDU
CIU
3-34
MCN2
0902YG220.book
35 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.3.3
Signal Processing Related This table shows how to handle the signal processing related errors whose codes do not appear. Phenomenon
3.3.4
Response
“Default shading correction coefficient is used” is displayed on the console.
• Calibrate unevenness by using the cassette
“Default QRV table is used” is displayed on the console.
• Calibrate sensitivity by using the cassette
“Default shading correction coefficient/QRV table is used” is displayed on the console.
• Calibrate unevenness and sensitivity by using
whose plate version is the same as that when the error occurred. whose plate version is the same as that when the error occurred. the cassette whose plate version is the same as that when the error occurred.
A strange noise from the device This table shows actions you should take when you hear a strange noise from the device. Phenomenon A strange noise (a jarring sound) is heard when a justifier guide is working.
3.3.5
Response Put grease (Multemp AC-D) on the justifier shaft lightly. For more information about the position of the justifier shaft, see «5.4.11 Replacing the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly (Page 5-55)».
Faulty operation by users This section describes problems caused by faulty operations by users.
Example: When the cassette that a user inserted is being pulled into the device, the user holds the cassette with hands, or the cassette is trembling. Possible problems The cassette is not pulled in correctly. The following error codes may appear. • 06300/06315 The justifier sensor is not good (when fixed). • 06350/06365 The receiver sensor is not good (when the cassette is being pulled in).
Response If the errors shown left appear, confirm how the user inserted the cassettes, and then provides instruction.
3-35
0902YG220.book
36 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4
How to Respond on Image Defect How to respond on image defect is described here.
3.4.1
Flow of Response Flow of response to image defect is described hereafter. Item
Description
Confirm the phenomenon Phenomenon in the table
Confirm the phenomenon of the image defect, and search if it is in table « Phenomenon List (page 3-37)».
Phenomenon not in the table
Unable to respond (contact)
Investigate the cause and respond Improved
No improvement
Unable to respond (contact)
Communicate the description of the condition (see « Information to Communicate») to the contact person.
See the reference in the table « Phenomenon List (page 337)» that corresponds to the phenomenon, investigate the cause and respond.
Communicate the description of the condition (see « Information to Communicate») to the contact person.
Respond process finished
Information to Communicate Communicate following information, as precise as possible, when communicating the status of image defect to the contact. Log
Collect various logs from the REGIUS console.
• • • •
Application log System log Reader log JM log
System information Image data Other, description
3-36
Backup the defect image from the REGIUS console.
0902YG220.book
37 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Phenomenon List Find the corresponding phenomenon from the list and respond according to the reference. No.
Phenomenon
Reference
1
Image is dark or black in general (still with structure of the object)
page 3-38
2
Image is bright or white in general (still with structure of the object)
page 3-38
3
Horizontal streak in part of the image
page 3-39
4
Horizontal streak all over the image
page 3-40
5
Vertical streak
page 3-41
6
Quasi-contour in the image
page 3-42
7
Jitter (jagged vertical line) in the image
page 3-43
8
Image size is different (vertically)
page 3-43
9
Image size is different (horizontally)
page 3-43
10
Top and bottom of the image is trimmed
page 3-43
11
Sides of the image is trimmed
page 3-43
12
Unevenness is not calibrated
page 3-44
13
Unevenness calibration data is too high (MAX-MIN is over 300 steps)
page 3-44
14
S value fluctuation
page 3-45
15
Not enough contrast (raw data)
page 3-45
16
Different density left to right
page 3-45
17
Dosage problem (compatibility problem with mAs value and S value, etc.)
page 3-45
18
Sandy image
page 3-46
19
White dot
page 3-46
20
Black dot
page 3-46
21
Monitor display problem (film is OK)
page 3-46
22
Duplex image
page 3-46
23
Sensitivity calibration do not fit within specification
page 3-46
24
All processed images are generally high in contrast
page 3-46
25
All processed images are generally low in contrast
page 3-47
26
Image out of focus
page 3-47
27
A white image (corrected data only) is output.
page 3-47
28
An image is slanted.
page 3-47
3-37
0902YG220.book
38 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.2
Image is Dark or Black in General (Still With Structure of the Object) No.
3.4.3
Response
1
Output density in the G process parameter is set high in general.
See the Image Process Adjustment Manual and set the Density H/L in the G process parameter lower.
2
X-ray dosage is too much (in case of fix the process or unprocessed image).
Confirm the exposure condition if the X-ray dosage is not too much.
3
S value (gain) set in the REGIUS console is too large (in case of fix the process or unprocessed image).
Set the S value to the appropriate value.
4
Sensitivity calibration problem (in case of Redo the sensitivity calibration. fix the process and unprocessed image).
5
The ROI recognized for process was not setup correctly for some reason.
Set the ROI to the correct position.
Image is Bright or White in General (Still With Structure of the Object) No.
3-38
Cause
Cause
1
Output density in the G process parameter is set low in general.
2
X-ray dosage is extremely low or not generated at all.
Response See the Image Process Adjustment Manual and set the Density H/L in the G process parameter higher.
• Confirm the exposure condition.Confirm that the exposure switch is not released during the X-ray exposure. • Confirm the X-ray dosage using the dosimeter.
3
S value (gain) set in the REGIUS console is too small (in case of fix the process or unprocessed image).
Set the S value to the appropriate value.
4
The ROI recognized for process was not setup correctly for some reason.
Set the ROI to the correct position.
5
Failure of the photomultiplier.
Replace the photo multiplier filter assy. See «5.6.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy (Page 5-81)» for the procedure to replace the photomultiplier filter or assy.
0902YG220.book
39 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.4
Horizontal Streak in Part of the Image
Important
Always perform the image size adjustment, the image position adjustment, the unevenness calibration, and the sensitivity calibration after replacing the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Streak appears in part of the image
No.
Cause
Response
1
External force was applied during the read.
Perform read again making sure no shock is applied to the equipment.
2
A wire for the subscan unit is scratched, or a foreign object is attached on the wire.
Confirm and clean the wire. If the problem persists, replace the wires.
3
The encoder for the subscan unit is scratched, or a foreign object is attached on the encoder.
Confirm and clean the encoder. If the problem persists, replace the encoders.
Phenomenon: Streak reaching sideways from a shielding material such as lead No.
Cause
1
It could happen when there are shielding material is located at the white area.
No.
Response
1
• Cause is so limited, ask the user to respond by methods such as moving the shielding material away from the object as much as possible or decrease the exposure field. • Communicate the contact if it recur.
Phenomenon: Density jump occur at about 30 mm from the top of image. No. 1
Cause Plate is in contact with the detach detection roller due to warp or detach of the plate.
No.
Response
1
• Return the plate with the warp or detach to the contact.
• Adjust the detach detection roller when it occurs in multiple plates.
3-39
0902YG220.book
40 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Phenomenon: Cyclic slanted streaks No.
Cause
1
There is a possibility that light is entering from outside.
Response Confirm by reading solid image after reattaching the exteriors, or darkening the room.
Phenomenon: 1 to few lines of horizontal line looking digital No.
3.4.5
Cause
Response
1
Connection failure
Confirm the connection of the LMC connectors (CN8, CN301, CN302, CN303).
2
H-sync signal detection problem.
Confirm the H-sync signal using the oscilloscope and replace the optical unit if there is a fault. • See «3.2.19 Confirm the H-sync Signal (Page 331)» for the procedure to confirm the H-sync. • See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
3
When there is any other digitalization (include density change)
Replace the LMC, CIU or PMU circuits (Photomultiplier tube filter assy) and confirm the operation. • For more information about how to replace the LMC, see «5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)». • For more information about how to replace the CIU, see «5.10.1 Replacing the CIU (Page 5121)». • For more information about how to replace the photomultiplier tube filter assy, see «5.6.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy (Page 5-81)».
Horizontal Streak All Over the Image
Important
Always perform the image size adjustment, the image position adjustment, the unevenness calibration, and the sensitivity calibration after replacing the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Horizontal streak in 7 line cycle No.
Cause
Response
1
Polygon correction
Redo the unevenness calibration.
2
There is a possibility that vignetting is occurring to the laser ray in the optical unit
Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Irregular horizontal streaks all over the left side of the image No. 1
3-40
Cause Fluctuation of laser intensity
Response Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
0902YG220.book
41 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Phenomenon: White streaks starting in the midway going all the way to the right edge of the image No. 1
Cause Fluctuation of laser intensity
Response Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Horizontal streak in 6 ~ 7 mm cycle No. 1
Cause Problem in subscan action due to the rust on the LM guide
Response Lubricate the LM guide. See «7.2.7 Greasing LM Guide (Page 7-11)» for the procedure to lubricate the LM guide.
Phenomenon: Horizontal streaks of 20 ~ 60 steps in 4 ~ 5 line cycle all over the image No. 1
3.4.6
Cause Under effect of the radiofrequency treatment equipment.
Response Confirm if the horizontal streaks disappear by turning OFF the radiofrequency treatment equipment or point the antenna away from the equipment. Increase the distance between the equipment and the radiofrequency treatment equipment or point the antenna of the radiofrequency treatment equipment away from the equipment if the streaks disappear.
Vertical Streak
Important
Always perform the image size adjustment, the image position adjustment, the unevenness calibration, and the sensitivity calibration after replacing the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Sharp white streak (width of 5 ~ 10 pixels) No.
Cause
Response
1
There is vertical scratch on the plate.
Replace the plate.
2
Vignetting might be happening to the laser by the dust stuck on the tip of the condensing unit of the optical unit.
Clean the light capacitor of the optical unit using a cleaning brush.
3-41
0902YG220.book
42 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Phenomenon: Sharp black streak (width of 5 ~ 10 pixels) No.
Cause
Response
1
Unevenness calibration was performed with a plate with scratch or dust on the tip of the condensing unit in the optical unit.
Redo the unevenness calibration with a plate without any scratch.
2
If there is a partial black steak with low dosage image like shown below, and not in the high dosage image, exciting light leakage.
Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Faint white streak (width of 20 ~ 100 pixels) No.
Cause
1
Could be a dust inside the optical unit.
2
Vignetting of the laser ray could be happening if there are several streaks all over the image.
Response Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
Phenomenon: Faint black steak No.
3.4.7
Cause
Response
1
When there is no streak by reading without any correction Correction could of been made with a dust on the CY2 mirror.
Redo the unevenness calibration.
2
White steak is at the same position by reading without any correction Could be a dust inside the optical unit.
Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
3
There is a possibility of vignetting of the laser or a ghost.
Quasi-Contour in the Image Phenomenon
Cause/Response
Only occur on the film output.
Confirm the imager.
Quasi-contour is visible even when image data is confirmed on the service tool.
Bit fallout in the image data after LMC.
• Replace the LMC. See «5.6.2 Replacing the LMC (Page 5-79)» for the procedure to replace the LMC. • Replace the CIU. See «5.10.1 Replacing the CIU (Page 5-121)» for the procedure to replace the CIU.
3-42
0902YG220.book
43 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.8
Jitter (Jagged Vertical Line) in the Image
Important
3.4.9
Always perform the image size adjustment, the image position adjustment, the unevenness calibration, and the sensitivity calibration after replacing the optical unit.
No.
Cause
Response
1
Rotation failure of the polygon if it is in 6 line cycle.
Replace the optical unit. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
2
Synchronization to the H-sync signal is not correct.
Confirm the input timing of the H-sync signal is not changed, and the pulse wave is not blunt. Replace the optical unit if you find any problem. • See «3.2.19 Confirm the H-sync Signal (Page 331)» for the procedure to confirm the H-sync. • See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
Image Size is Different (Vertically) No.
Cause
Response
1
Pixel size of the printer (40 µm) is not setup correctly.
Confirm the setup and correct.
2
Set the wrong printer type by mistake.
Confirm the setup and correct.
3.4.10 Image Size is Different (Horizontally) No. 1
Cause Image size setup value was replaced.
Response Confirm and correct the image size setup value.
3.4.11 Top and Bottom of the Image is Trimmed No.
Cause
1
Aperture of the X-ray is not appropriate.
Response Confirm the exposure field.
3.4.12 Sides of the Image is Trimmed No.
Cause
Response
1
Aperture of the X-ray is not appropriate.
Confirm the exposure field.
2
Horizontal start point is not appropriate.
Confirm and change the horizontal start point.
• Communicate the contact if it recur after the response.
3-43
0902YG220.book
44 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.13 Unevenness is Not calibrated • Confirm if the image can be acquired without correction. No.
Cause
1
Image data used for unevenness calibration was faulty.
2
(Does not improve after performing the above action)
Response Redo the unevenness calibration with a plate without any scratch or smudge.
• Replace the CF card. See «5.10.3 Replacing the CF Card (Page 5-124)» for the procedure to replace the CF card. • Replace the CIU. See «5.10.1 Replacing the CIU (Page 5-121)» for the procedure to replace the CIU.
3.4.14 Unevenness Calibration Data is Too High (MAX-MIN is Over 300 Steps)
Important
3-44
Always perform the image size adjustment, the image position adjustment, the unevenness calibration, and the sensitivity calibration after replacing the optical unit.
No.
Cause
Response
1
Exposure condition of the image used in the unevenness calibration is not appropriate.
Redo the exposure with appropriate exposure condition.
2
Plate or the light condensing unit in the optical unit is dirty.
Clean the plate and the light condensing unit in the optical unit.
3
Object was exposed on the image that Redo the exposure without any object getting was used for the unevenness calibration. exposed.
4
Polygon correction data is too large (over 300 steps)
Replace the optical unit if it is still large after redoing the unevenness calibration. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
0902YG220.book
45 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.15 S Value Fluctuation Phenomenon Fluctuation within same equipment
Fluctuate when the sampling pitch is different
87.5µm and 175 µm will not have identical S value due to the difference in the read pitch, resulting as difference in the luminance.
Fluctuate with identical sampling pitch
Confirm if the exposure conditions (X-ray quality, distance, exposure area) and the process (condition key, etc.) are identical on both exposures. S value will fluctuate if there is any difference in them. S value also will fluctuate if the ROI for the process is different.
Fluctuate compared with other REGIUS MODEL 110
Fluctuate compared with different model
Response
Redo the sensitivity calibration if the S value is different even after confirming the exposure conditions (X-ray tube, grid, X-ray quality (tube voltage), distance, exposure range) were identical.
Compare with 150
S value will be different if the x-ray tube, grid, or exposure condition are not equivalent.
Compare with 170
(To be stated)
Compare with 190
(To be stated)
Compare with 330
S value will be different if the x-ray tube, grid, or exposure condition are not equivalent.
Compare with 350 or 550
S value will be different if the x-ray tube, grid, or exposure condition (beware of focal distance) are not equivalent.
3.4.16 Not Enough Contrast (Raw Data) No.
Cause
Response
1
—
Confirm the presence of the aperture.
2
—
Confirm the X-ray tube voltage referring to the recommended value in the medical notebook.
3
—
Confirm the process parameters (E, F, H).
3.4.17 Different Density Left to Right • Expose solid image and compare with the solid image taken at the installation. If there is a difference in the density left to right, cause 2. No.
Cause
Response
1
Alignment of the grid is not appropriate.
Redo the exposure after adjusting the alignment.
2
The condensing unit in the optical unit is dirty.
Clean the condensing unit in the optical unit and redo the unevenness calibration.
3.4.18 Dosage Problem (Compatibility Problem with mAs Value and S Value, Etc.) No.
Cause
Response
1
Sensitivity calibration is not appropriate.
Redo the sensitivity calibration.
2
X-ray tube failure (After measuring the mAs value and the mR, there was no linearity comparing the MR for 1 mA, 10 mAs, and 100 mAs against the log-log.)
Request the X-ray tube manufacturer to take response.
3-45
0902YG220.book
46 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.19 Sandy Image No.
Cause
Response
1
Not enough dosage from X-ray tube.
Confirm the dosage of the X-ray tube. Perform the mR measurement and confirm if there is any X-ray.
2
Wrong exposure conditions
Confirm the exposure conditions referring to the recommended value in the medical notebook.
3.4.20 White Dot No.
Cause
Response
1
There is a dust on the plate.
Clean the plate and confirm the solid image.
2
Plate fault (missing pixel)
Replace the plate.
3.4.21 Black Dot No. 1
Cause Exposed on the plate that was not erased.
Response Erase the image on the plate and redo the exposure.
3.4.22 Monitor Display Problem (Film is OK) No. 1
Cause Density does not match the light box.
Response Regenerate the display LUT.
3.4.23 Duplex Image No.
Cause
Response
1
Exposed on the plate that was not erased.
Confirm that the erase lamp is on for certain when erasing.
2
Plate fault (plate might been damaged by X-ray exposure above allowable)
Confirm the plate right after the erase action without any compensation. Replace the plate if any image appears.
3.4.24 Sensitivity Calibration Do Not Fit Within Specification No.
Cause
Response
1
Exposure condition and input value used for the sensitivity calibration was incorrect.
Confirm the exposure condition and input value for the image is correct.
3.4.25 All Processed Images are Generally High in Contrast No.
Cause
Response
1
Output density in the process parameter is set high in contrast in general.
• Reset the rotate/shift parameter output density H lower. • Reset the rotate/shift parameter output density L higher. See the Image Process Adjustment Manual for details.
3-46
0902YG220.book
47 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.4.26 All Processed Images are Generally Low in Contrast No.
Cause
Response
1
Output density in the process parameter is set low in contrast in general.
• Reset the rotate/shift parameter output density H higher.
• Reset the rotate/shift parameter output density L lower. See the Image Process Adjustment Manual for details.
3.4.27 Image Out of Focus
Important No. 1
2
Always perform the image size adjustment, the image position adjustment, the unevenness calibration, and the sensitivity calibration after replacing the optical unit.
Cause
Response
X-ray exposure time is too long. Organs will move when the time is longer.
• Confirm the exposure time to the site. Also
Fault in the beam diameter
• Measure the chart method MTF. • Replace the optical unit if the value of 2 cycles/
confirm that the display S value is less than 50 and abnormally small. • Confirm there is no problem with the photo timer.
mm is 22% or less. See «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit (Page 5-11)» for the procedure to replace the optical unit.
3.4.28 A White Image (Corrected Data Only) is Output No. 1
Cause Fault in power supply to PMU
Response
• Confirm the supply voltage of 12 V to PMU. (Confirm whether the fuse for F11 (IC protector) has been burned out.) • Confirm other supply voltage to PMU.
3.4.29 An Image is Slanted No.
Cause
Response
1
A foreign object is attached on the frame of the cassette or back panel.
Clean a corresponding part.
2
The cassette is deformed.
Replace the cassettes.
3
The reference of the receiver base (cassette contact part of the cassette lock) is slanted.
Repair it at a factory.
3-47
0902YG220.book
48 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 4
4
Confirming Operation Using Service Tool Methods to confirm the operation of REGIUS MODEL 110 is described here.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Before Confirming the Operation …………………..4-2 Display [Unit Test] Screen…………………………….4-3 Confirming Operation for Each Unit ……………….4-6 Confirming by Step Operation……………………….4-8 Confirming the Status of the Sensors …………..4-17
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4.1
Before Confirming the Operation 4.1.1
Outline of Confirming the Operation To confirm the operation of each unit of the REGIUS MODEL 110 or confirm the status of the sensors, operate the [Unit Test] screen in the service tool (only for the REGIUS MODEL 110) on the REGIUS console. [Unit Test] screen
Network Hub
REGIUS Console
REGIUS MODEL 110
The equipment will go into maintenance mode once the [Unit Test] screen is displayed, and only the commands from the REGIUS console displaying the [Unit Test] will be accepted (same status as performing the calibration). Following operation can be performed on the [Unit Test] screen:
• • • • •
4-2
Stand-alone operation of each unit Step operation (perform each step in order of read sequence, and display OK/NG of each operation) Display status of the sensors Setup of the reader parameter such as volume Setup of compensation value such as justifier (operation for the setup is possible too)
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4.2
Display [Unit Test] Screen How to display and outline of the function of the [Unit Test] screen, a service tool to perform the confirmation of operation of the REGIUS MODEL 110, is described here.
4.2.1
Display [Unit Test] Screen (In Case of REGIUS Unitea)
1
Start up the reader setting service tool from REGIUS Unitea-S (server). The reader setting service tool screen is displayed.
2
Click the [Setting] button in Unite Test. The [Unit Test] screen is displayed. See “Chapter 12 Service Tool Screen» in the Installation/Service Manual for the REGIUS Unitea on how to start up the service tool and about the service setting service screen.
4.2.2
Display [Unit Test] Screen (In Case of CS-1/CS-2/CS-3)
1
Start up the service tool from the (REGIUS) service screen of the REGIUS console. [Service Tool] screen (console) is displayed.
2
Click the [Reader] button. [Service Tool] screen (reader) is displayed.
3
Click the [Unit Test] button in the [REGIUS 110]. [Unit Test] screen is displayed. See the Installation/Service Manual for the REGIUS console on how to display the (REGIUS) service screen and [Service Tool] screen (console/reader).
• CS-1: See «Chapter 13 Service Tool Screen» • CS-2: See «Chapter 12 Service Tool Screen» • CS-3: See «Chapter 14 Service Tool Screen»
4-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4.2.3
Function Outline of the [Unit Test] Screen
[Unit Test] is composed of 8 screens, and panels are switched using the tab. Contents of each panels are as following: Panel name Indicator
Description Stand-alone operation for following units can be confirmed.
• Lamps on the operation panel • Status lamp DC Motor
Stand-alone operation for following units can be confirmed.
• Shutter Motor • Lock Motor Pulse Motor
Stand-alone operation for following units can be confirmed.
• Receive Motor • Justifier Motor • Transporter Motor Linear Motor
Stand-alone operation for following units can be confirmed.
• Subscan Motor Others
Stand-alone operation for following units can be confirmed.
• • • • Settings
Barcode reader Polygon Mirror Halogen Lamp Fluorescent Lamp
Following setups can be performed.
• LCD displayed language • Speaker volume Also, stand-alone operation for following units can be confirmed.
• LCD • Speaker
4-4
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
Panel name Adjustment
Description Following adjustment can be performed.
• Amount of Justification (Justifier Motor) • Pressing Amount (Transporter Motor) Monitoring
• Confirmation of the operation by step operation of the mechanical can be performed.
• Monitor of the sensor can be performed.
Stand-alone operation confirmation of the unit and operation confirmation by step operation is described in this chapter.
• See «4.3 Confirming Operation for Each Unit (Page 4-6)» for the procedure to perform stand-alone confirmation the unit.
• See «4.4 Confirming by Step Operation (Page 4-8)» for the procedure to perform the operation confirmation by step operation.
• See «8.1 Service Tool Screen (Unit Test) (Page 8-2)» for the description of [Unit Test] screen.
4-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4.3
Confirming Operation for Each Unit Procedure to confirm the operation is explained here using stand-alone action of the receiver motor.
Caution
1
Do not use the cassette for confirming operation for each unit (except for «Adjustment» and «Monitoring» panels). To perform confirmation using the cassette, perform the confirming by step operation. See «4.4 Confirming by Step Operation (Page 4-8)» for confirming by step operation.
Click the [Pulse Motor] in the [Unit Test] screen. [Pulse Motor] panel is displayed.
Note
Only the [Initialization] button is available for each motor in the [Pulse Motor] panel when it is first displayed. Buttons to move to available positions will be enabled once the initialization is performed for each motor. Every time the motor is moved, available position will change, and only applicable buttons will be enabled. [Initialization] button will be enabled regardless of the position.
2
Select the cassette size to be emulated from the [Cassette Type]. When the [Cassette Type] is changed, only [Initialization] button will be enabled like Note when the panel was switched.
3
Click the [Initialization] button for the receiver motor. Initialization of the receiver mechanism is performed. Initialization here is to move other mechanism so it will be possible to operate the receiver. Once the initialization is completed, [Move to HP] button is enabled. Also, a message [Initialization … OK] is displayed in the [Information] area saying that the initialization has finished without any problem.
4-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4
Click the [Move To HP] button. Receiver will move to the home position. Once the move is completed without any problem, a message [Move To HP … OK] is displayed in the [Information] area and [Position 1] button is enabled.
5
Click the [Position 1] button. Receiver will move to the home position. Once the move is completed without any problem, a message [Position 1 … OK] is displayed in the [Information] area, and [Move to HP] button and [Position 2] button are enabled. Likely, the [Move To HP] button and [Transportation Position] button will be enabled after it moved to the second falling position by clicking the [Position 2] button. Also, the [Move To HP] button and [Position 1] button will be enabled after it moved to the transportation position by clicking the [Transportation Position] button.
4-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4.4
Confirming by Step Operation Procedure to confirm the operation by step operation is described here.
Note
1
Step operation is different from normal read action in the following points. • Vibration halt delay action will not be performed. • Laser does not come on, and PMT high voltage value is 0 V. • Subscan speed for reading direction is fixed to 175µm read. • Reading and transmission of image will not be performed. • Subscan speed for erasing direction is fixed to quick erase. • Erase lamp will not come on.
Click the [Monitoring] tab in the [Unit Test] screen. [Monitoring] panel is displayed.
2
Select the cassette used to perform the step operation in the [Cassette Type]. Select [Cassette] when the actual cassette is to be used. Select the cassette size to be emulated if the actual cassette is not used.
3
Click the [Initialization] button. Initialization action will be performed, and [Next] button will be enabled one it is completed.
4-8
0902YG220.book
9 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4
Click the [Next] button. Step operation is performed.
When using the cassette Click the [Next] button after setting the cassette in the insertion slot. Operation check is performed for each step operation, and the step operation sequence ID and its result will be displayed in the [Information] area. See « Step Operation Sequence» for the step operation and the sequence ID. As an example, if the cassette detection operation was OK, «[0] Detection of the cassette….OK» will be displayed.
5
Click the [Next] button again to move to next step. Ejecting a Cassette If you are using a cassette, the cassette will be ejected from the insertion slot in sequence ID 21. To move to next step, click [Next] button after removing the cassette. Once the last step (sequence ID 23) is completed, «Next [All]… OK» is displayed in the [Information] field, and [Initialization] button becomes available.
Step Operation Sequence Step operation sequence will differ depending on the use/no use of the cassette. (Perform the operation with a {) Sequence type* A
SeqID
Operation
B
{
0
Detection of the cassette
{
1
Reading the barcode
{
{
2
Shutter open & wait for cassette to drop
{
{
3
Move the receiver to the first falling position
{
{
4
Fix the cassette with the justifier guide at the first falling position
{
{
5
Slightly release the cassette fixation by the justifier guide
{
{
6
Move the receiver to the second falling position
{
{
7
Fix the cassette with the justifier guide at the second falling position
{
{
8
Move the push plate unit to the press down position & shutter close
{
{
9
Release the lock
{
{
10
Move the push plate unit to the read position
{
{
11
Slightly lower the receiver
{
{
12
Read
{
{
13
Erase
{
{
14
Move the push plate unit to the press down position
{
{
15
Lock
4-9
0902YG220.book
10 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
Sequence type*
SeqID
Operation
A
B
{
{
16
Move the push plate unit to the passing point of the home position
{
{
17
Move the push plate unit to the home position & shutter open
{
{
18
Slightly release the cassette fixation by the justifier guide
{
{
19
Move the receiver to the first falling position
{
{
20
Move the justifier guide to the home position
{
{
21
Move the receiver to the home position
22
Detect the eject of cassette
23
Shutter close
{ {
{
*: Sequence type A: Using the cassette B: Not using the cassette
Sensor Status for Each Step The status of sensors when a step action is completed by using the cassette with a size of about 35.4 x 35.4 cm is indicated. A red box in the figure below indicates the sensor whose status has been changed since the previous step. Regarding the status of the sensor that depends on the type of cassette and the status of the sensor that users should pay attention to, see explanatory notes below the figures.
After Initialization
4-10
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
SeqID=0: Detection of the cassette
«Cassette Insertion S2» stays OFF when the cassette is 20.3 x 25.4 cm, 18 x 24 cm or 15 x 30 cm.
SeqID=1: Reading the barcode
SeqID=2: Shutter open & wait for cassette to drop
Since it is in a transition state immediately after the cassette drops, the status of Receiver S is not definite. Confirm the status of Receiver S in the following SeqID=3.
SeqID=3: Move the receiver to the first falling position
Since it is in a transition state immediately after the cassette drops, the status of Back Plate S is not definite. Confirm the status of Back Plate S in the following SeqID=4.
4-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
SeqID=4: Fix the cassette with the justifier guide at the first falling position
SeqID=5: Slightly release the cassette fixation by the justifier guide
Depending on the position of the cassette on the receiver when the justifier is opened slightly, the status of Justifier S1 and that of Justifier S2 are not definite, but they are fine operation-wise.
SeqID=6: Move the receiver to the second falling position
SeqID=7: Fix the cassette with the justifier guide at the second falling position
4-12
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
SeqID=8: Move the push plate unit to the press down position & shutter close
SeqID=9: Release the lock
SeqID=10: Move the push plate unit to the read position
SeqID=11: Slightly lower the receiver
4-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
SeqID=12: Read
SeqID=13: Erase
SeqID=14: Move the push plate unit to the press down position
SeqID=15: Lock
4-14
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
SeqID=16: Move the push plate unit to the passing point of the home position
SeqID=17: Move the push plate unit to the home position & shutter open
SeqID=18: Slightly release the cassette fixation by the justifier guide
Depending on the position of the cassette on the receiver when the justifier is opened slightly, the status of Justifier S1 and that of Justifier S2 are not definite, but they are fine operation-wise.
SeqID=19: Move the receiver to the first falling position
Since it is in a transition state immediately after the receiver rises, the status of Receiver S is not definite. Confirm the status of Receiver S in the following SeqID=20.
4-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
SeqID=20: Move the justifier guide to the home position
SeqID=21: Move the receiver to the home position
Cassette Insertion S2 stays OFF when the cassette is 20.3 x 25.4 cm, 18 x 24 cm or 15 x 30 cm.
SeqID=22: Detect the eject of cassette
SeqID=23: Shutter close (finished)
4-16
0902YG220.book
17 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 4 Confirming Operation Using Service Tool
4.5
Confirming the Status of the Sensors Confirmation procedure of the sensor status is described here.
1
Click the [Monitoring] tab in the [Unit Test] screen. [Monitoring] panel is displayed.
2
Click the [Start] button. Monitoring of the sensor status of the REGIUS MODEL 110 will start. Most current sensor status will be displayed in the «Sensor Status» every 1 second once the monitor is started.
3 4
Confirm the status of the sensors. Click the [Stop] once the confirmation is completed. Monitoring of the sensor status will finish.
4-17
0902YG220.book
18 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 5
5
Disassembly and Assembly This chapter describes the instructions on how to disassemble/ assemble the equipment.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8
Before Disassembly …………………………………….5-2 Basic Works ……………………………………………….5-3 Replacing the Parts on the Insertion Unit ……..5-19 Replacing the Parts on the Receiver unit………5-39 Replacing the Parts on the Subscan Unit ……..5-64 Replacing the Parts on the Optical Unit ………..5-78 Replacing the Parts on the Eraser Unit…………5-85 Replacing the Parts on the Detach Detection Unit………………………………………………………….5-88 5.9 Replacing the Parts on the Exterior ……………..5-92 5.10 Replacing the Parts on the Framework……….5-121
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.1
Before Disassembly 5.1.1
Precautions during Disassembly/Assembly
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
Caution
5-2
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. Failure to do so may lead to malfunction, causing your fingers to be wedged between the sliding or rotating parts inside the equipment.
Use the anti-static wristband when handling the electronic parts inside the equipment. It is possible to damage the electronic part by touching it with static buildup.
Do not touch inside the equipment with your bare hand. Otherwise, the equipment may be rusted by stain or sebum on your hand, leading to malfunction in the sliding or rotating parts.
When assembling the equipment, restore the wiring layouts to their original positions and make sure no wire is wedged between or stuck with the attaching parts. A wire wedged between or stuck with the attaching parts will cause malfunction in the equipment.
Never loosen the setscrew painted white or yellow. Loosing it may make the equipment unable to be restored in the service site.
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2
Basic Works This section describes the works including the basic instructions on how to remove/install the exterior panels that are required in disassembling/assembling the equipment.
5.2.1
Power OFF/ON This section describes the instructions on how to turn the power off/on on the equipment.
Power OFF Turn the power supply circuit breaker OFF and unplug the power cable and the Ethernet cable.
1
Press and hold the «operation» switch for 3 seconds or longer. Shutdown action will take place and the «operation» lamp will go off when completed.
4’#&; operation
erase
«operation» Switch
2
3 4
Turn off the power supply circuit breaker.
Unplug the power cable from the equipment and the power outlet. Unplug the Ethernet cable.
Important
Place the unplugged power cable and Ethernet cable in a place where they will not be stepped on while servicing.
Second Front Back Side Now, you have finished with the procedures to turn the power off.
5-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Power ON Connect the Ethernet cable and power cable and turn ON the power.
1 2
Connect the Ethernet cable to the equipment. Connect the power cable to the equipment and power outlet.
Second Front Back Side
operation
erase
3
Turn on the power supply circuit breaker.
4
Press the «operation» switch. Equipment will start up and initialization will be performed. When the initialization is completed, «READY» will be shown on the message display window.
«operation» Switch Now, you have finished with the procedures to turn the power on.
5-4
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2.2
Moving the Equipment Move the equipment to a place available for servicing if it is hard to operate service at the installation site.
Moving to the Maintenance Space
1
Move the optical unit to the second front side and fix it using the simple fixing lock. • When the optical unit moves all the way Note
2
3 4 Over 600 mm
5 Over 600 mm
Loosen the adjusters (4 locations).
Move the equipment to a place capable of operation. Secure a space of 600 mm or more in four directions.
Over 600 mm
Over 600 mm
toward the front, fixing shaft will automatically lower to lock. • The second front door that is locked with the simple fixing lock cannot be fully closed. (for the purpose of preventing the unit from being left locked).
Fix the equipment so that it will not move using the adjusters (4 locations) after moving it. Release the simple fixing lock. Lock will be released by pulling up the blue knob.
Important
Push the optical unit slightly towards the back when pulling up the knob. Fixing shaft might move down, and get locked again if the optical unit is at its hithermost position. Also, move the optical unit to confirm that the fixing shaft is not lowered after unlocking.
Now, you have finished with the procedures for moving the equipment to the maintenance space.
5-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2.3
Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit This section describes the instructions on how to remove and install the exterior panel and insertion unit.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
Removal Procedures Work outline Listed below are the personnel number and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1 The exterior panels (first front, first front back and second front back panels) can be removed in any order.
Removing the Second Front Back Panel
1
Remove the second front back panel. • 6 screws (M4 x • 1 spacer each (for 4 locations excluding the middle stage)
Second Front Back Side Removing the First Front Back Panel
2
Remove the first front back panel. • 7 screws (M4 x Remove the panel with both hands, holding on the bottom and pulling away from the equipment.
First Front Back Side
5-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Removing the First Front Panel
3
Remove the first front panel. • 6 screws (M4 x Remove the panel with both hands, holding on the bottom and pulling away from the equipment.
First Front Side Removing the Insertion Unit
4
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6)
B
Loosen all screws. • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
3
2
Remove the circuit board cover.
Remove all screws.
4
A
1 First Front Back Side
5
• CN1 (MCN1: cable) • CN2 (MCN2: cable)
CN1 MDU
Remove the connectors from the MDU, and remove the cable from the wire saddle.
CN2
First Front Back Side
6
Remove the screws from the insertion unit. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x If the push plate unit is not located at the read position, then the optical unit cannot be moved: You cannot access one of the screws retaining the insertion unit, if the optical unit is located at the second front backside.
First Front Side
See « If the insertion unit has not been removed: (page 5-17)» in «5.2.6 Moving the Push Plate Unit» to move the push plate unit to the read position, then move the optical unit to the second front side.
5-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
7
Remove the insertion unit. Place the removed insertion unit upside down to prevent any damage inside, on a stable location.
Caution
Remove the unit carefully so the cables disconnected in Step 5 do not get caught.
Now, you have finished with the procedure to remove the exterior panels and the insertion unit.
Installation Procedures Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Installing the Insertion Unit
1
Install the insertion unit on the equipment. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Tighten the screws in the following order: 1. Tighten three screws loosely on the first front side. 2. Tighten a screw firmly on the second front side. 3. Tighten the three screws firmly that have been loosened on the first front side. 4. Tighten a screw on the back of the second front side firmly.
Caution
Take care of the cable routing and not to pinch the cable.
First Front Side
2 CN1 MDU
CN2
First Front Back Side
5-8
Connect the cables on the insertion unit to the MDU, and then put the cables through the wire saddle. • MCN1 → CN1 (MDU) • MCN2 → CN2 (MDU)
0902YG220.book
9 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Install the circuit board cover. • A: 3 screws (M3 x 6) • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
B 2
3
1
A
4 First Front Back Side
Installing the First Front Panel
4
Install the first front panel. • 6 screws (M4 x Hold the bottom part of the first front panel with both hands, and install it by inserting the top part of panel into the panel.
5
Close the second front door.
6
Install the first front panel.
First Front Side Installing the First Front Back Panel
• 7 screws (M4 x Hold the bottom part of the first front back panel with both hands, and install it by inserting the top part of panel into the panel.
First Front Back Side Installing the First Front Back Panel
7
Install the first front back panel. • 6 screws (M4 x • 1 spacer for each screw (for 4 locations excluding the middle one)
Second Front Back Side Now, you have finished with the procedures to install the exterior panels and the insertion unit.
5-9
0902YG220.book
10 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2.4
Removing/Installing the Second Front Door This section describes the instructions on how to remove and install the second front door.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
Removal Procedures
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 3)
1
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the fulcrum bracket assembly, while supporting the second front door. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x
3
Remove the second front door from the lower pin.
Second Front Side Now, you have finished with the procedures to remove the second front door.
Installation Procedures
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 1 to 2)
1
1
Insert the second front door into the lower pin.
2
Install the fulcrum bracket assembly. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x
3
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to install the second front door.
5-10
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2.5
Removing/Installing the Optical Unit This section describes the instructions on how to remove and install the optical unit.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Requirements Shown below is the tool requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
Tool
1
Vinyl sheet (used for covering the light condensing unit to screen out dust on it)
Positions of the Setscrews on the Optical Unit The optical unit is secured to the holding plate unit assembly on the subscan unit with 6 screws. Remove 2 setscrews on the second front side after moving the optical unit to the second front side. Remove a total of 4 setscrews on the first and second front sides after moving the optical unit to the second front back side.
Second Front Side
Second Front Back Side
Removal Procedures
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 12)
1
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Move the optical unit to the second front side.
Second Front Side 5-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Fix the unit using a simple fixing lock.
Note
When the optical unit moves all the way toward the front, fixing shaft will automatically lower to lock.
Second Front Side
4
Remove the setscrews on the second front side of the optical unit. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
5
Release the simple fixing lock. Lock will be released by pulling up the blue knob. Push the optical unit slightly towards the back when pulling up the knob. Fixing shaft Important might move down, and get locked again if the optical unit is at its hithermost position.
Second Front Side
Second Front Back Side
6 7
Move the optical unit to the second front back side. Fix the unit using a simple fixing lock. Push the blue fixing shaft lever to lower the fixing shaft and have the unit locked.
Fixing Shaft Lever
5-12
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
8
Remove the cables connected to the optical unit. • LMC • CN1 (ACN1: cable) • CN2 (ACN2: cable) • CN4 (ACN4: cable) • CN5 (ACN5: cable) • CN9 (ACN9: cable) • LMD • CN2 (LMCN2: cable)
Second Front Back Side
This connector may have been fixed very tightly.
CN2 CN1
• Eraser unit junction cable • JJ61 (JP61: cable)
CN4 CN5 CN9
Caution
9
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the snap ties and other parts. • Snap ties at 3 locations • Tie fixtures at 4 locations
CN2
You do not have to cut off the ties coming with the tie fixtures.
JP61
10
Remove the setscrews on the first front back side of the optical unit. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
First Front Back Side
11
Remove the setscrews on the second front back side of the optical unit.
• 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
Second Front Back Side
5-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
12 Knob
Remove the optical unit, holding the knob on top of the optical unit with the bottom surface. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place.
Second Front Back Side If you are going to lay it down, turn up the light condensing unit and cover it with a vinyl sheet in order to screen out dust on it.
Light Condensing Unit
Vinyl sheet Now, you have finished with the procedures to remove the optical unit.
Installation Procedures Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 1 to 18)
1
Second Front Back Side
1
Move the holding plate on the subscan unit to the second front back side to fix it using a simple fixing lock. Pushing the blue fixing shaft will lower the fixing shaft, resulting in the plate locked.
Fixing Shaft
2 Knob
Second Front Back Side 5-14
Place the optical unit on the holding plate.
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Temporarily fix the setscrews on the second front back side. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
Second Front Back Side
4
• LMC • CN1 (ACN1: cable) • CN2 (ACN2: cable) • CN4 (ACN4: cable) • CN5 (ACN5: cable) • CN9 (ACN9: cable) • LMD • CN2 (LMCN2: cable) • Eraser unit junction cable • JJ61 (JP61: cable)
Second Front Back Side
CN2 CN1
5
CN4 CN5 CN9
Connect the cables to the circuit board on the optical unit.
Install the snap ties and other parts. • Snap ties at 3 locations • Tie fixtures at 4 locations
CN2
JP61
6
Release the simple fixing lock and move the optical unit to the second front side. Pulling the blue knob up will release the lock.
7 8
In the second front side, fix the optical unit using a simple fixing lock. Temporarily fix the setscrews on the second front side. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
Second Front Side
5-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
9
Release the simple fixing lock and move the optical unit to the second front back side.
10
In the second front back side, fix the optical unit using a simple fixing lock.
11
Install the setscrews on the first front back side.
• 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
First Front Back Side
12
Release the simple fixing lock and move the optical unit to the second front side.
13
In the second front side, fix the optical unit using a simple fixing lock.
14
Fully tighten the setscrews on the second front side. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
Second Front Side
15
Release the simple fixing lock and move the optical unit to the second front back side.
16
In the second front back side, fix the optical unit using a simple fixing lock.
17
Fully tighten the setscrews on the second front back side. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 12)
Second Front Back Side
19
18
Release the simple fixing lock.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the exterior panel and insertion unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to install the optical unit.
5-16
0902YG220.book
17 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2.6
Moving the Push Plate Unit This section describes the instructions on how to move the push plate unit with the power off.
Caution
• First, move the optical unit to the second front back side, then move the push plate unit. • When moving the push plate unit into the vicinity of the press down position, be careful so that it will not contact the receiver.
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
If the insertion unit has not been removed:
1 2 3 First Front Back Side
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel. Move the optical unit to the second front back side. Turn A (drive shaft presser) in the figure to move the push plate unit. Relationship between the rotating direction of A in the figure (drive shaft holder) and the movement direction of the push plate is as shown below.
A
Rotating Direction Seen From Above
Movement Direction
Clockwise
First Front Side
Counter Clockwise
First Front Back Side
If the insertion unit has been removed:
1 2
Move the optical unit to the second front back side. Turn the shaft to move the push plate unit. Relationship between the rotating direction of the shaft and the movement direction of the push plate is as shown below. Rotating Direction
Movement Direction
Clockwise
First Front Side
Counter Clockwise
First Front Back Side
5-17
0902YG220.book
18 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.2.7
Binding the Grounding Strap
Caution
You must bind the grounding strap when accessing the circuit board in order to prevent the circuit board being damaged by static discharge.
1
5-18
Bind the grounding strap around your wrist, then have the other clip nip the metallic portion of the main unit that is surely grounded.
0902YG220.book
19 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.3
Replacing the Parts on the Insertion Unit 5.3.1
Replacing the Operation Unit (Operation Panel) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the operation unit. Following are the procedures available for the unit with the horizontal positioning, though the same procedures can be used for the unit with the vertical positioning.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Remove the operation unit. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
3
Unplug a cable from the operation unit. • Connector (OCN1)
Caution
OCN1
4 5
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cable to the new operation unit. See Step 2 to install the operation unit. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
Important
Confirm that the light-shielding sponge is contained properly in the cable area for the operation panel.
5-19
0902YG220.book
20 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the operation unit.
5.3.2
Changing the Mounting Location of the Operation Unit This section describes the instructions on how to change the mounting location of the operation unit. Following are the procedures taking example for the case that the horizontal positioning will be changed to the vertical positioning, though the same procedures can be used for the unit with the vertical positioning.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
Attachment Position of the Operation Panel
Horizontal Positioning (Factory Default)
Vertical Positioning
Operation Unit
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Remove the dummy operation panel. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
5-20
0902YG220.book
21 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Unplug the cable to the operation unit at the clamps. • Clamps for 2 locations
4
Remove the operation unit. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
5
Place the operation unit at the position where the dummy operation unit was placed. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
Important
6
Confirm that the light-shielding sponge is contained properly in the cable area for the operation panel.
Follow the figure to wire the cables to the operation unit. • Clamps for 4 locations
5-21
0902YG220.book
22 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
7
Install the dummy operation unit. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
Important
8
Install the unit in a direction so that the bottom of the «Cassette loaded/Do not sit on» label is the operation side.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to change the mounting location of the operation unit.
5.3.3
Replacing the Eraser Cooling Fan This section describes the instructions on how to replace the eraser cooling fan.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2 JJ19
5-22
Remove the connector (JJ19).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
0902YG220.book
23 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the eraser cooling fan. • 2 tapping screws (M4 x 25)
4
Install the new eraser cooling fan. • 2 tapping screws (M4 x 25)
5 6
Connect the connector (JJ19) that was removed in Step 2.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the eraser cooling fan.
5.3.4
Replacing the Indicator This section describes the instructions on how to replace the indicator.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Remove the insertion indicator unit assembly. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10)
5-23
0902YG220.book
24 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Unplug a cable from the indicator. • Connector (J39)
Caution
J39
4
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the indicator. • 2 tapping screws (M3 x
5
Install the new indicator. • 2 tapping screws (M3 x
6
Connect the cable to the indicator. • Connector (J39)
7
Install the insertion indicator unit assembly. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) Move the insertion indicator in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the indicator.
5.3.5
Replacing the Barcode Reader This section describes the instructions on how to replace the barcode reader.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
5-24
0902YG220.book
25 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the light shield cover. • A: 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • B: 1 screw (M4 x Remove the sponge protecting the cable at the right side of the light shield cover too.
A B
3
Remove the connector (JJ38).
JJ38 Caution
4
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the barcode reader. • 2 screws (M2 x 6) • 1 washer for each screw
5
Install the new barcode reader. • 2 screws (M2 x 6) • 1 washer for each screw Move the barcode reader in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
6
7
Connect the connector (JJ38) that was removed in Step 3.
Install the light shield cover that was removed in Step 2. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • 1 screw (M4 x Attach the sponge to the right side of the light shield cover, and wrap the cable with it.
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the barcode reader.
5-25
0902YG220.book
26 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.3.6
Replacing the Back Plate Drop Detection Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the back plate drop detection sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Remove the light shield cover. • A: 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • B: 1 screw (M4 x Remove the sponge protecting the cable at the right side of the light shield cover too.
A B
3 4
Remove the back plate drop detection sensor. Unplug the cable from the back plate drop detection sensor. • Connector (J37)
J37
Caution
5 6 7
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cable to the new back plate drop detection sensor. Install the back plate drop detection sensor. Install the light shield cover that was removed in Step 2. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • 1 screw (M4 x Attach the sponge to the right side of the light shield cover, and wrap the cable with it.
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the back plate drop detection sensor.
5-26
0902YG220.book
27 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.3.7
Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LLB) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the insertion slot detection sensors (LLB).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Remove the light shield cover. • A: 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • B: 1 screw (M4 x Remove the sponge protecting the cable at the right side of the light shield cover too.
A B
3
Sensor 2 (LLB1)
Remove the insertion slot detection sensors (LLB). • Insertion slot detection sensor 1: 1 screw (M3 x 6) • Insertion slot detection sensor 2: 1 screw (M3 x 6)
J31
4
Unplug the cables from the insertion slot detection sensors (LLB). • Insertion slot detection sensor 1: connector (J32) • Insertion slot detection sensor 2: connector (J31)
J32
Caution
Sensor 1 (LLB2)
5 6
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cables to the new insertion slot detection sensors (LLB). Install the insertion slot detection sensors (LLB). • Insertion slot detection sensor 1: 1 screw (M3 x 6) • Insertion slot detection sensor 2: 1 screw (M3 x 6)
5-27
0902YG220.book
28 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
7
Install the light shield cover that was removed in Step 2. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • 1 screw (M4 x Attach the sponge to the right side of the light shield cover, and wrap the cable with it.
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the insertion slot detection sensor (LLB).
5.3.8
Replacing the Insertion Slot Detection Sensors (LPB) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the insertion slot detection sensors (LPB).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 12)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section.
1
No.
Tool
1
0.2 mm spacer (film, etc.) A piece of film has about 0.2 mm in thickness.
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Grounding Cable JP36
Unplug the cables connected to the shutter unit assembly. • • • •
Connector (JP20): shutter motor Connector (JP36): shutter close detection sensor Connector (JP35): shutter open detection sensor Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
JP35 JP20
5-28
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
0902YG220.book
29 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the shutter unit assembly. • 5 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
4
Remove the sensor cover. • 2 screws (M4 x
Sensor 2 (LPB1)
5
Remove the insertion slot detection sensors (LPB). • Insertion slot detection sensor 1: 1 screw (M3 x 6) • Insertion slot detection sensor 2: 1 screw (M3 x 6)
6
J34
Unplug the cables from the insertion slot detection sensors (LPB). • Insertion slot detection sensor 1: connector (J34) • Insertion slot detection sensor 2: connector (J35)
J33
Caution
Sensor 1 (LPB2)
7 8
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cables to the new insertion slot detection sensors (LPB). Install the insertion slot detection sensors (LPB). • Insertion slot detection sensor 1: 1 screw (M3 x 6) • Insertion slot detection sensor 2: 1 screw (M3 x 6)
9
Install the sensor cover that was removed in Step 4. • 2 screws (M4 x
5-29
0902YG220.book
30 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
10
Install the shutter unit assembly that was removed in Step 3. • 5 tapping screws (M4 x 10) Press it in a direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
11
Use a 0.2 mm-spacer (film) to check the clearance between the lock cam and the stopper block.
0.2mm
If the clearance is any other value than 0.2 mm, adjust the position of the stopper block.
12
Grounding Cable
Connect the cables that were unplugged in Step 2 to the shutter unit assembly. • • • •
JP36
Connector (JP20): shutter motor Connector (JP35): shutter close detection sensor Connector (JP36): shutter open detection sensor Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
JP35
Caution
Always attach the grounding cable in the direction shown in the figure.
JP20
13
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the insertion slot detection sensor (LPB).
5-30
0902YG220.book
31 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.3.9
Replacing the Shutter Open Detection Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the shutter open detection sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 10)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section.
1
No.
Tool
1
0.2 mm spacer (film, etc.) A piece of film has about 0.2 mm in thickness.
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Grounding Cable JP36
Unplug the cables connected to the shutter unit assembly. • • • •
Connector (JP20): shutter motor Connector (JP36): shutter close detection sensor Connector (JP35): shutter open detection sensor Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
JP35
Caution
JP20
3
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the shutter unit assembly. • 5 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
5-31
0902YG220.book
32 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Remove the bracket from the shutter open detection sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x
5 6
7
Remove the shutter open detection sensor. Install the new shutter open detection sensor on the bracket.
Install the bracket that was removed in Step 4. • 1 screw (M4 x
8
Install the shutter unit assembly that was removed in Step 3. • 5 tapping screws (M4 x 10) Press it in a direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
0.2mm
9
5-32
Use a 0.2 mm-spacer (film) to check the clearance between the lock cam and the stopper block. If the clearance is any other value than 0.2 mm, adjust the position of the stopper block.
0902YG220.book
33 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
10
Grounding Cable
Connect the cables that were unplugged in Step 2 to the shutter unit assembly. • • • •
JP36
Connector (JP20): shutter motor Connector (JP35): shutter close detection sensor Connector (JP36): shutter open detection sensor Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
JP35
Caution
Always attach the grounding cable in the direction shown in the figure.
JP20
11
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the shutter open detection sensor.
5.3.10 Replacing the Shutter Close Detection Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the shutter close detection sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2 JP36
Unplug the cable from the shutter close detection sensor. • Connector (JP36)
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
5-33
0902YG220.book
34 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the bracket from the shutter close detection sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x
4 5
6
Remove the shutter close detection sensor. Install the new shutter close detection sensor on the bracket.
Install the bracket that was removed in Step 3. • 1 screw (M4 x
7
Connect the cables that were unplugged in Step 2 to the shutter close detection sensor. • Connector (JP36)
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the shutter close detection sensor.
5.3.11 Replacing the Shutter Motor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the shutter motor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
5-34
0902YG220.book
35 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the connector (JP20).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
JP20
3
Remove the shutter motor. • 3 screws (M3 x 6)
4
Install the new shutter motor. • 3 screws (M3 x 6)
5 6
Connect the connector (JP20) that was removed in Step 2.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the shutter motor.
5.3.12 Replacing the Shutter Unit This section describes the instructions on how to replace the shutter unit.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
Tool
1
0.2 mm spacer (film, etc.) A piece of film has about 0.2 mm in thickness.
5-35
0902YG220.book
36 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the insertion unit. Reverse the removed insertion unit and place it in a stable place in order to perform the replacing work.
2
Grounding Cable JP36
Unplug the cables connected to the shutter unit assembly. • • • •
Connector (JP20): shutter motor Connector (JP36): shutter close detection sensor Connector (JP35): shutter open detection sensor Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
JP35
Caution
JP20
3
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the shutter unit assembly. • 5 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
4
Replace the parts. Removing the Shutter Motor and Shutter Sensor Unit Assembly
5-36
0902YG220.book
37 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Removing the Shutter Motor and Shutter Plate unit Assembly and Cam Unit Assembly
Removing the Lock Unit Assembly
5-37
0902YG220.book
38 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Assembly Figure
Watch for orientation
5
Install the shutter unit assembly that was removed in Step 3. • 5 tapping screws (M4 x 10) Press it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
6
Use a 0.2 mm-spacer (film) to check the clearance between the lock cam and the stopper block.
0.2mm
If the clearance is any other value than 0.2 mm, adjust the position of the stopper block.
7
Grounding Cable
Connect the cables that were unplugged in Step 2 to the shutter unit assembly. • • • •
JP36
Connector (JP20): shutter motor Connector (JP36): shutter close detection sensor Connector (JP35): shutter open detection sensor Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
JP35
Caution
Always attach the grounding cable in the direction shown in the figure.
JP20
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the shutter unit.
5-38
0902YG220.book
39 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.4
Replacing the Parts on the Receiver unit 5.4.1
Replacing the Justifier HP Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier HP sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 6)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2 Justifier Guide
While the justifier guide is located upon the justifier HP sensor, turn A (thrust collar) to move the justifier guide.
A Note
You can hold the justifier guide knob (green portion) to move the guide in the second front side.
First Front Side
3
Remove the justifier HP sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
4
Unplug the cable from the justifier HP sensor. • Connector (JP41)
JP41 Caution
First Front Side
5 6
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cable to the justifier HP sensor. Install the justifier HP sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
7
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the justifier HP sensor.
5-39
0902YG220.book
40 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.4.2
Replacing the Justifier Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1 2
Open the second front door. Remove the justifier detection mount board. • 1 screw (M4 x If the justifier guide is not located in the home position (second front) side: Hold the justifier guide knob (green portion) to move it toward you.
Knob Second Front Side
3
Unplug the cable from the justifier sensor. • Connector (JP40)
JP40
Caution
4 5 6
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the justifier sensor. Install the new justifier sensor on the positioning detection mount board. Connect the cable to the justifier sensor. • Connector (JP40)
7
Install the justifier detection mount board. • 1 screw (M4 x Press it in a direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
Second Front Side Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the justifier sensor.
5-40
0902YG220.book
41 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.4.3
Replacing the Justifier Motor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier motor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 12)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Acoustic wave tension meter
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the exterior frame (front). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3 JP50
Remove the connector (JP50).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
First Front Side
5-41
0902YG220.book
42 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4 Setscrew
Remove the motor mount board. 1. Loosen the adjustable screws.
• 2 hexagon socket head bolts (M4 x 20)
Adjustable screw
2. Remove the setscrews.
• 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 3. Remove the motor mount board.
Adjustable Screw Setscrew
5
Remove the justifier motor. • 4 screws (M4 x 12)
6
Remove the gear. • 2 setscrews
7
Install the gear on the new justifier motor. • 2 setscrews Fix the gear, fitting the edge surfaces of it and the motor shaft.
8
See Step 5 to install the justifier motor on the motor mount board. • 4 screws (M4 x 12)
Important
9 Setscrew
Make sure the connector is in the right direction when installing the motor.
Temporarily secure the motor mount board to the main unit. • 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Setscrew
5-42
0902YG220.book
43 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
10
See «6.1 Adjust Justifier Belt Tension (Page 6-2)» to adjust the belt tension.
11 12
Connect the connector (JP50) that was removed in Step 3. Install the exterior frame (front) that was removed in Step 2.
• Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x
13
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the justifier motor.
5.4.4
Replacing the Justifier Standard Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier standard sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 11)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the second front back panel and first front panel.
2
Move the optical unit to the second front side. If the push plate unit is not located at the read position, then the optical unit cannot be moved: See « If the insertion unit has not been removed: (page 5-17)» in «5.2.6 Moving the Push Plate Unit» to move the push plate unit to the read position, then move the optical unit to the second front side.
Second Front Side
5-43
0902YG220.book
44 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the setscrew from the cassette detection unit assembly. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x
First Front Side
4
Eject the cassette detection unit assembly from the second front back side.
Second Front Back Side
5
Unplug the cable. • Connector (JP44)
JP44
Caution
6
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the justifier detection mount board 2. • 1 tapping-screw (M4 x 10)
7 8
9
Remove the justifier standard sensor. Install the new justifier standard sensor on the justifier detection mount board 2.
See Step 6 to install the justifier detection mount board 2. • 1 tapping-screw (M4 x 10)
10
Connect the cable that was unplugged in Step 5 to the justifier standard sensor. • Connector (JP44)
5-44
0902YG220.book
45 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
11
See Step 3 and Step 4 to install the cassette detection unit assembly.
• 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x
12
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the removed exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the justifier standard sensor.
5.4.5
Replacing the Receiver Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier receiver sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 11)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Move the optical unit to the second front side.
Second Front Side
3
Turn the gear shown in the figure to move the receiver toward the uppermost part.
Important
When holding directly the receiver to move it up and down, be sure to hold it at the position approximate to the belt.
First Front Side
5-45
0902YG220.book
46 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Remove the receiver cover unit assembly. • 1 screw (M4 x Access from the first front back side, using a long screw driver.
First Front Back Side
5
Remove the receiver detection mount board. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
6
Unplug the cable from the receiver sensor. • Connector (JP42)
Caution
JP42
7 8 9
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the receiver sensor. Install the new receiver sensor on the receiver detection mount board. Connect the cable to the receiver sensor. • Connector (JP42) Lower the receiver to the position easy to make the connection, as needed.
10
Install the receiver detection mount board that was removed in Step 5. • 1 screw (M4 x
11
Install the receiver cover unit assembly that was removed in Step 4. • 1 screw (M4 x
12
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the receiver sensor.
5-46
0902YG220.book
47 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.4.6
Replacing the Receiver HP Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the receiver HP sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the exterior frame (front). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Remove the receiver unit. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x
First Front Side
5-47
0902YG220.book
48 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Unplug the cable from the receiver HP sensor. • Connector (JP43)
Caution
JP43
5
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the receiver HP sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
6
Install the new receiver HP sensor on the receiver sensor mount board. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
7
Connect the cable to the receiver HP sensor. • Connector (JP43)
8
Install the receiver sensor mount board that was removed in Step 3. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
9
Install the exterior frame (front) that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the receiver HP sensor.
5.4.7
Replacing the Receiver Motor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the receiver motor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 11)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
5-48
0902YG220.book
49 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the exterior frame (front). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Remove the connector (JP51).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
JP51
First Front Side
4
Remove the receiver motor mount board. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen only the upper screw.
Loosen
5
Remove the receiver motor. • 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
5-49
0902YG220.book
50 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
Remove the gear. • 2 setscrews (M4 x 5)
7
Install the gear on the new receiver motor. • 2 setscrews (M4 x 5) When installing, make sure the clearance between the motor main unit and the gear is 1 mm.
1mm
8
See Step 5 to install the receiver motor on the receiver motor mount board. • 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Important
9
Make sure the connector is in the right direction when installing the motor.
Install the receiver motor mount board. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Dowel
Press the board rightward until it reaches the dowel, then fix it by pressing upward so as not to form any clearance at A (between the edge of the motor and the pulley) shown in the figure.
A
Dowel
10
Connect the connector (JP51) that was removed in Step 3.
11
Install the exterior frame (front) that was removed in Step 2.
• Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x
12
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the receiver motor.
5-50
0902YG220.book
51 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.4.8
Replacing the Lock HP Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the lock HP sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 6)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the second front back panel and first front panel.
2
Move the optical unit to the second front side. If the push plate unit is not located at the read position, then the optical unit cannot be moved: See « If the insertion unit has not been removed: (page 5-17)» in «5.2.6 Moving the Push Plate Unit» to move the push plate unit to the read position, then move the optical unit to the second front side.
Second Front Side
3
Remove the lock HP sensor. Leave the pin unit assembly moved leftward, then release the notch of the lock HP sensor to remove the sensor from the second front back side.
JP45
4
Unplug the cable from the lock HP sensor. • Connector (JP45)
Pin Assembly Caution
Second Front Back Side
5
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cable to the new lock HP sensor. • Connector (JP45)
6 7
Install the lock HP sensor.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel and the second front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the lock HP sensor.
5-51
0902YG220.book
52 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.4.9
Replacing the Lock Motor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the Lock Motor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the connector (JP16).
Caution JP16
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
First Front Side
3
Remove the lock release motor unit assembly. • 2 screws (M4 x
4
Remove the cam unit assembly. • 2 setscrews
5-52
0902YG220.book
53 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Remove the Lock Motor. • 3 screws (M3 x 6)
6
Install the new Lock Motor on the motor mount board. • 3 screws (M3 x 6)
7
Install the cam unit assembly. • 2 setscrews Fix the gear, aligning the Surface A in the figure.
A
8
Install the lock release motor that was removed in Step 3. • 2 screws (M4 x
9 10
Connect the connector (JP16) that was removed in Step 2.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the Lock Motor.
5.4.10 Replacing the Receiver (Receiver Unit Assembly) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the receiver (receiver unit assembly).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
5-53
0902YG220.book
54 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Wiring band
See Step 1 to Step 6 in «5.4.12 Replacing the Receiver Belt (Page 5-58)» to remove the receiver belt.
2
Remove the connector (JP17) from the relay cable on the receiver sensor.
JP17
Caution
3
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Cut off the wiring band (at 2 locations) to lead the cable inside the equipment.
First Front Side
4
Remove the receiver. • 4 screws (M4 x 6)
Caution
5
5-54
The receiver is secured to the guide. Work must be performed, supporting or setting down the guide so as to keep it up.
Replace the parts.
0902YG220.book
55 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Important
If the cable has been unplugged, align the white mark of the cable with the Hole A shown in the figure, then bind the cable with the wiring band to fix.
A
6
Install the receiver. • 4 screws (M4 x 6) Press the receiver in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to secure it to the guide on the slide pack.
7 JP17
Connect the connector (JP17), that was removed in Step 2, to the original position to secure the cable to the guide with the wiring band.
Important
Make sure that no twisted part is found in the cable, then align the white mark of it with the fixing position (B in the figure) to fix it.
B
First Front Side
8
See the descriptions following Step 7 in «5.4.12 Replacing the Receiver Belt (Page 5-58)» to install the receiver belt. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the receiver (receiver unit assembly).
5.4.11 Replacing the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier guide unit assembly.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
5-55
0902YG220.book
56 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Wiring band
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remover snap ties (2 locations) and remove the connector (JJ18).
JJ18
First Front Side
3
Move the justifier guide to the center of the shaft.
Second Front Side
4
Remove the setscrews from the justifier base (justifier guide unit assembly). • 2 screws (M4 x Do not remove the justifier guide unit assembly at this time because the justifier guide and the timing belt are left attached on the assembly.
First Front Side
5
Remove the belt presser plate from the justifier guide. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) Incline the justifier guide unit assembly to remove the screw from the first front side.
First Front Side
5-56
0902YG220.book
57 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6 7
Eject the justifier guide unit assembly from inside the equipment. Replace the parts. Checking the Justifier Guide Unit Assembly after Assembled Incline the justifier guide unit assembly to make sure that the guide can be moved by its own weight. If it cannot, the justifier shaft has not been assembled parallel to the guide.Adjust the justifier shaft by tightening or loosening the setscrew.
Fixing the Cable
Important
8
If the cable has been unplugged from the justifier guide, align the white mark with the fixing position, then fix the cable using the wiring band.
See Step 5 and Step 4 to install the justifier guide unit assembly. • Belt presser plate: 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) • Justifier base: 2 screws (M4 x Press the justifier guide unit assembly upward to fix it.
Second Front Side
9 First Front Side
A
Important
JJ18
Yellow White
10 -15mm
Plug the connector (JJ18) for the justifier sensor, and fix it by using snap ties (2 locations). Twist of the cable • Fix the cable so that it will twist in the direction indicated with an arrow in the figure. Position where the cable is fixed • If a cable has a yellow marker, fix the cable with the yellow marker aligned with position A in the figure. • If a cable does not have a yellow marker (or if the cable has a white marker only), fix the cable with the white marker aligned with the position 10 to 15 mm away from position A in the figure. In such a case, move the justifier guide to the left end to confirm that the cable is not pulled too much.
5-57
0902YG220.book
58 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
10 11
See «6.1 Adjust Justifier Belt Tension (Page 6-2)» to adjust the belt tension.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the justifier guide unit assembly.
5.4.12 Replacing the Receiver Belt This section describes the instructions on how to replace the receiver belt.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Turn the gear shown in the figure to move the receiver to the top.
Important
When holding directly the receiver to move it up and down, be sure to hold it at the position approximate to the belt.
First Front Side
3
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
5-58
0902YG220.book
59 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Loosen the receiver belt tension. 1. Loosen the setscrews on the receiver idler pulley unit assembly.
• 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 2. Loosen the adjustable screws. • 1 hexagon socket head bolts (M4 x 20) • 1 hexagon nut 3. Raise the receiver idler pulley unit assembly fully, then loosen the setscrews to fix the assembly.
• 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Setscrew
Adjustable screw Setscrew
First Front Side
5
Cover the LM guide and the magnet shaft on the subscan unit using a rag or cardboard.
Caution
Falling down or banging the parts onto the LM guide or the magnet shaft may affect performance of the equipment. Cover the LM guide and the magnet shaft using a shock-absorbing object before removing/ installing the parts inside the equipment.
First Front Back Side
6
Remove the belt presser plates (2 pieces) first, then the timing belt. • 2 screws for each plate (M3 x 6) Remove the lower belt presser plate first.
Caution
Remove the upper belt presser plate to automatically release the timing belt from the receiver and drop the receiver. Be sure to support the receiver when removing the upper belt presser plate.
First Front Back Side
7
Install the new timing belt. • 2 belt presser plates • 2 screws for each plate (M3 x 6)
㈩✢ Wiring guide ࠟࠗ࠼
5-59
0902YG220.book
60 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Perform installation so that two belt cogs are exposed for each receiver cog.
8
See «6.2 Adjust Receiver Belt Tension (Page 64)» to adjust the belt tension.
9
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 3. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the receiver belt.
5.4.13 Replacing the Justifier Belt This section describes the instructions on how to replace the justifier belt.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 16)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
5-60
Tool
1
Acoustic wave tension meter
3
Waste cloth (used for greasing)
No. 2
Tool Grease (Multemp AC-D)
0902YG220.book
61 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the exterior frame (front). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Move the justifier guide to the center of the shaft.
First Front Side
4
Remove the setscrews of the justifier base (justifier guide unit assembly). • 2 screws (M4 x
First Front Side
5
Remove the belt presser plate first, then the timing belt. • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10) Incline the justifier guide unit assembly to remove the screw from the first front side.
First Front Side
5-61
0902YG220.book
62 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
Remove the justifier motor connector (JP50).
Caution
JP50
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
First Front Side
7 Setscrew
Remove the motor mount board. 1. Loosen the adjustable screws.
• 2 hexagon socket head bolts (M4 x 20)
Adjustable screw
2. Remove the setscrews.
• 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 3. Remove the motor mount board.
Adjustable Screw Setscrew
8
Remove the gear first, then the timing belt. • Gear: 1 screw (M4 x • Thrust collars: 2 setscrews for each one
9
Lead the new timing belt and install the gear. • Gear: 1 screw (M4 x • Thrust collars: 2 setscrews for each one Fix the thrust collar placed far from you, mating the surfaces of it and the shaft end.Fix the thrust collar placed toward you, pressing it lightly to the shaft so as not to have the shaft misaligned after the collar is fixed.
Note
10 Setscrew
For the upper gear, install it, mating the surfaces of the thrust collar and the shaft end for the left side, while pressing lightly for the right side.
Temporarily secure the motor mount board to the main unit. • 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Setscrew
5-62
0902YG220.book
63 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
11 12
Connect the connector (JP50) that was removed in Step 6. See Step 5 to install the timing belt on the justifier guide.
• Belt presser plate • 1 tapping screw (M4 x 10)
13
See Step 4 to install the justifier base. • 2 screws (M4 x Press the base upward to fix it.
Second Front Side
14 15
See «6.1 Adjust Justifier Belt Tension (Page 6-2)» to adjust the belt tension. Apply grease to the justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. • Grease: Multemp AC-D Always use the specified grease.
A
Important Apply grease on entire area by turning A.
First Front Side
16
Install the exterior frame (front) that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x
17
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the justifier belt.
5-63
0902YG220.book
64 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.5
Replacing the Parts on the Subscan Unit 5.5.1
Replacing the Subscan HP Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the subscan HP sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 10)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Wiring band
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the second font back panel.
Second Front Back Side
2
3
Move the optical unit to the second front back side.
Unplug the subscan HP sensor cable from LMC. • CN5 (ACN5: subscan HP sensor cable)
Second Front Back Side
CN5
5-64
Caution
4
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Cut off the wiring band binding other cables (at 4 locations).
0902YG220.book
65 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Remove the photo sensor unit assembly. • 1 screw (M3 x 10)
Second Front Back Side
6
Remove the subscan HP sensor. • 2 screws (M3 x 6)
7
Install the new subscan HP sensor on the sensor spacer. • 2 screws (M3 x 6)
8
Install the photo sensor unit assembly. • 1 screw (M3 x 10) Press the photo sensor unit assembly upward to fix it so that the setscrew on the subscan HP sensor is led into the screw relief hole in the holding plate.
Second Front Back Side
9
Connect the subscan HP sensor cable that was unplugged in Step 3 to LMC. • CN5 (ACN5: subscan HP sensor cable)
10
See Step 4 to fix the cable using the wiring band.
Important
11
Do not have the cables protrude from the optical base. After fixing the cables, move the optical unit back and forth to confirm that it can move smoothly and work properly.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the second front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the subscan HP sensor.
5-65
0902YG220.book
66 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.5.2
Replacing the Simple Fixing Unit This section describes the instructions on how to replace the simple fixing unit.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section.
1
No.
Tool
1
Vinyl sheet (used for covering the light condensing unit to screen out dust on it)
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with the light condensing unit up.
2 3
Fix the cable that was connected to the optical unit to the holding plate using tape. Move the holding plate on the subscan unit to the second front side.
4
Remove the fixing shaft knob. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
Second Front Side
5
Remove the simple fixing unit assembly. • 2 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
A
Eject the anchor bearing (A in the figure) with it held pressed down using a precision screw driver or other tool.
A
6 7
Replace the parts. See Step 5 to install the simple fixing unit. • 2 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
Second Front Side 5-66
0902YG220.book
67 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
8
Install the fixing shaft knob that was removed in Step 4. • 1 screw (M3 x 6) Install it with the textured surface down.
9
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the simple fixing unit.
5.5.3
Replacing the Encoder/Wires This section describes the instructions on how to replace the encoder. The same procedures as below can be used to replace the wire, excluding the items on installing and removing the encoder.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Caution
Cover the LM guide and magnet shaft for the subscan unit with a rag or cardboard. If you remove a wire cover when the magnet shaft is not covered with a material such as a rag, tools and parts will be attracted due to the strong magnetic force. In such a case, you may hit your hands to the equipment. This could injure you. Also, the LM guide and magnet shaft may be damaged.
First Front Back Side Work outline
Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 3 to 30)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Vinyl sheet (used for covering the light condensing unit to screen out dust on it)
No. 2
Tool Acoustic wave tension meter
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with the light condensing unit up.
2
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-10)» in «5.2.4 Removing/Installing the Second Front Door» to remove the second font door.
5-67
0902YG220.book
68 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Rotate the shaft clockwise, and move the push plate unit slightly to the first front side. This work is intended to enable you to access the setscrews on the wire cover (that will be removed in Step 6).
First Front Back Side
4 5 6
Fix the cable that was connected to the optical unit to the holding plate using tape. Move the holding plate to the second front back side. Remove the wire cover. • 2 screws (M4 x • Remove the screws, supporting the wire Caution
First Front Back Side
7 8
cover to keep it from falling down on the wire. • Keep the wire cover away from the magnet shaft.
Move the push plate unit to the read position. To replace the encoder, see «5.5.2 Replacing the Simple Fixing Unit (Page 5-66)» to remove the simple fixing unit. To replace the wire only, the simple fixing unit does not need to be removed.
9
• 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x 12)
Adjustable screw Setscrew
Loosen the setscrew on the wire holding assembly in the second front back side.
10
Loosen the adjustable screw to loosen the wire tension. • 1 screw (M4 x 12)
Second Front Back Side
5-68
0902YG220.book
69 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
11
Loosen the setscrew on the wire presser plate in the second front back side to remove the wire.
• 1 screw (M4 x Loosen the screw. Put down the removed wire without pulling at it or anything.
Caution
12
Handle the wire carefully so as not to damage or fold it.
Loosen the setscrew on the wire presser plate in the second from side to remove the wire. • 1 screw (M4 x Loosen the screw.
Second Front Side
13
Disconnect the wire from the encoder. • If the encoder is not replaced, skip to Step 21. • If the encoder is replaced, stick the removed wire to the cassette absorption plate, making sure the wire is not folded back.
14 ACN4
Cut off the wiring band binding the encoder cable (connector: ACN4) and the other cables. The wired optical unit is shown in the figure for reference, though the optical unit has been already removed.
5-69
0902YG220.book
70 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
15 16
Move the holding plate to the second front side. Remove the encoder unit assembly. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 10)
A
Move the holding plate on the subscan unit until the setscrews fixing the encoder bracket reaches the position A in the figure in order to remove the screws one by one.
First Front Back Side
17
Remove the encoder. • 3 screws (M3 x 6)
18
Install the new encoder.
• 3 screws (M3 x 6)
19
See Step 16 to install the encoder unit assembly. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 10) Fix the encoder unit assembly by pressing in the direction of the arrow in the figure.
Note
It will be easier to install if you temporarily attach the encoder unit assembly using screws, and then pressing it in the direction of the arrow in the figure.
20 See «5.5.2 Replacing the Simple Fixing Unit (Page 5-66)» to install the simple fixing unit assembly.
21
Pull the wire into the equipment carefully so as not to fold it. Stick one front edge the wire to the cassette absorption plate magnet from the second front side, then pull out the stuck the front edge from the second front back side.
22 Fix one front edge the wire using the wire presser plate in the second front back side.
• 1 screw (M4 x Install the wire with the level surface in the installation part down. Install other wire in this way for the second front side.
5-70
0902YG220.book
71 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
23 Give a single wrapping of the wire around the encoder.
Follow the descriptions in the figure to wrap.
Important
24 See Step 12 to fix the other front edge of the wire using the wire presser plate in the second front side.
• 1 screw (M4 x
25 See Step 10 to slightly tighten the tension in the wire.
Note
If the tension in the wire is left loosen, the wire may be disconnected from the encoder while warming up the wrapping (Step 26).
26 Move the holding plate back and forth three times or more to warm up the wire wrapping.
Second Front Back Side
27
See «6.4 Adjust Wire Tension (Page 6-10)» to adjust the wire tension.
28 Rotate the shaft clockwise and move the push plate unit slightly toward the first front side following the instruction in Step 3.
29 Install the wire cover that was removed in Step 6. • 2 screws (M4 x
Caution
• Do not drop the wire cover on the wire. • Keep the wire cover away from the magnet shaft.
30 Move the push plate unit to the read position. 31
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-10)» in «5.2.4 Removing/Installing the Second Front Door» to install the second front door.
32 See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the encoder or wires.
5-71
0902YG220.book
72 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.5.4
Replacing the Tumbler (Lower) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the tumbler (lower).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 4)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
First Front Back Side Top
2
Turn the shaft clockwise to move the push plate near the transporter home position. This work is intended for the case that the push plate is at the read position. 1. Move the optical unit to the second front back side. 2. Turn the shaft clockwise to move the push plate near the transporter home position.
3
Remove the tumbler (lower). • 2 screws for each plate (M4 x
4
Install the new tumbler (lower). • 2 screws for each plate (M4 x
Important
Make sure that it is able to receive the push plate unit (as shown in the figure) after installing it.
First Front Back Side
5
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the exterior panel and insertion unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the tumbler (lower).
5-72
0902YG220.book
73 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.5.5
Replacing the Cable Bear This section describes the instructions on how to replace the cable bear.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Caution
Cover the LM guide and magnet shaft for the subscan unit with a rag or cardboard. If you remove a wire cover when the magnet shaft is not covered with a material such as a rag, tools and parts will be attracted due to the strong magnetic force. In such a case, you may hit your hands to the equipment. This could injure you. Also, the LM guide and magnet shaft may be damaged.
First Front Back Side Work outline
Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 20)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool
No.
Wiring band
2
Tool Snap ties
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
Note
It is recommended the insertion unit be removed to let in light in order to work with the inner part of the equipment, though the insertion unit can be replaced without removing it.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
5-73
0902YG220.book
74 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the connectors (JP13, JJ14).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
JP13 JJ14
First Front Side
4
Remove the connector and the grounding cable from the optical unit. • LMC • CN1 (ACN1: cable) • CN2 (ACN2: cable) • CN9 (ACN9: cable) • Eraser unit junction cable
Second Grounding cable Front Back Side
• JJ61 (JP61: cable) • Grounding cable
CN2
Caution
CN1
5
CN9
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the snap ties and other parts. • Snap ties at 3 locations • A: wiring band at a location (cut it off)
A
JP61
6
Remove the connector (CN11) from the CIU. • CN11 (CCN11: cable)
CN11 Caution
First Front Back Side
5-74
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
0902YG220.book
75 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
7
Cut off the wiring band (5 locations) retaining the cable removed in Step 6. When installing, position the white mark on the cable to the position A in the figure. In addition, when fixing, make sure that the cable is located outside at the positions A, B, D and E.
Second Front Back Side
8
Remove the cable bear unit assembly from the holding plate. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
9
Remove the cable bear unit assembly from the subscan base. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
First Front Side
10
Remove the tap plate and the tap plate B from the cable bear tie.
Grounding Cable
• Tap plate (subscan base mount side) • 1 screw (M3 x 6) • Snap tie (remove it) • Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw
Tie
(M4 x
• Tap plate B (holding plate mount side) • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
11
Install the tap plate and the tap plate B on the new cable bear tie.
• Tap plate (subscan base mount side) • 1 screw (M3 x 6) • Snap tie (remove it) • Grounding cable: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x
• Tap plate B (holding plate mount side) • 1 screw (M3 x 6) When installing the grounding cable, incline it as shown in the figure.
12 13
Fix the cables excluding a serial cable using the snap ties. See Step 9 to install the cable bear unit assembly on the subscan base. • 1 screw (M3 x 6) Move the tap plate to the first front back side, and then fix it.
5-75
0902YG220.book
76 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
14
Wire the serial cable (connector: CCN11) and fix it using the wiring band. Position the white mark on the cable to the position A in the figure. In addition, when fixing, make sure that the cable is located outside at the positions A, B, D and E.
E
D C
B
A Second Front Back Side
15
Connect the serial cable connector to the CIU. • CN11 (CCN11: cable)
CN11
First Front Back Side
16
See Step 3 to connect the cable bear side cables with the connectors (JP13, JJ14).
17
See Step 8 to install the cable bear unit assembly on the holding plate. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
18
Make sure that the cable bear unit assembly has been mounted appropriately. Move the holding plate with the receiver fully down to make sure that the cable bear does not contact the receiver and the receiver base. Make sure that the cable bear can fit a pocket for the guide for the subscan base.
19
See Step 4 and Step 5 to connect the cable to the optical unit and fix it using the snap ties and the wiring band. • LMC • CN1 (ACN1: cable) • CN2 (ACN2: cable) • CN9 (ACN9: cable) • Eraser unit junction cable • JJ61 (JP61: cable) • Grounding cable
5-76
0902YG220.book
77 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
20 Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2.
• Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
21
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the cable bear.
5-77
0902YG220.book
78 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.6
Replacing the Parts on the Optical Unit 5.6.1
Replacing the LMD This section describes the instructions on how to replace the LMD.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • See «5.2.7 Binding the Grounding Strap (Page 5-18)» to bind a grounding strap in order to protect the circuit board from damage due to static discharge.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the second font back panel.
Second Front Back Side
2
Move the optical unit to the second front back side and fix it using the simple fixing lock. Push the blue fixing shaft lever to lower the fixing shaft and have the unit locked.
Fixing Shaft Lever
3
Unplug all the cables connected to the LMD. Each connector may have been fixed very tightly.
Caution
Second Front Back Side LMC
4
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the LMD. • 4 screws (M3 x 6) Be careful, when removing the LMD, so as not to damage the connector in the backside that connects it to the LMC.
LMD
CN2
5-78
5
Install the new LMD. • 4 screws (M3 x 6)
0902YG220.book
79 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
Connect the cables removed in Step 3 to the LMD. • CN2 (LMCN2: cable)
7
Release the simple fixing lock. Lock will be released by pulling up the blue knob.
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the second front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the LMD.
5.6.2
Replacing the LMC This section describes the instructions on how to replace the LMC.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Caution
• See «5.2.7 Binding the Grounding Strap (Page 5-18)» to bind a grounding strap in order to protect the circuit board from damage due to static discharge.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See «5.6.1 Replacing the LMD (Page 5-78)» to remove the LMD.
2
Unplug all the cables connected to the LMC.
Caution
Second Front Back Side
3
CN8
LMC
CN6 CN401
CN4
Remove the LMC. • 4 screws (M3 x 6)
CN2 CN7
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
CN5
CN1 CN302 CN301
4
Install the new LMC. • 4 screws (M3 x 6)
CN402
LMD
CN303 CN9
5-79
0902YG220.book
80 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Connect the cables removed in Step 2 to the LMC. • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6
CN1 (ACN1: cable) CN2 (ACN2: cable) CN301 (ACN301: cable) CN302 (ACN302: cable) CN303 (ACN303: cable) CN401 (ACN401: cable) CN402 (ACN402: cable) CN4 (ACN4: cable) CN5 (ACN5: cable) CN6 (ACN6: cable) CN7 (ACN7: cable) CN8 (ACN8: cable) CN9 (ACN9: cable)
See «5.6.1 Replacing the LMD (Page 5-78)» to install the LMD. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the LMC.
5.6.3
Replacing the Inverter This section describes the instructions on how to replace the inverter.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with it kept stood.
2
Unplug all cables from the inverter.
Caution
3 CN1 CN2
A
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the inverter. • 4 screws (M3 x 12) • 1 collar for each (3 locations excluding A in the figure)
4
Install the new inverter. • 4 screws (M3 x 12) • 1 collar for each (3 locations excluding A in the figure)
5-80
0902YG220.book
81 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Connect the cables removed in Step 2 to the inverter. • CN1 (ICN1: cable) • CN2 (ICN2: cable)
6
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the inverter.
5.6.4
Replacing the Photomultiplier Tube Filter Assy This section describes the instructions on how to replace the photomultiplier tube filter assembly.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
Tool
1
Vinyl sheet (used for covering the light condensing unit to screen out dust on it)
Halogen Lamp
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit on a flat, stable location with the halogen lamp facing up.
5-81
0902YG220.book
82 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the screws of the photomultiplier tube filter assembly. • 4 screws (M4 x 12)
3
Pull out the photomultiplier tube filter assembly about 20 mm.
20 mm
4 UCN8
Unplug the cable connected to the PMU of the photomultiplier tube filter assembly from the LMC. • Connector (UCN8)
Caution
5-82
When removing the connector, hold the notch on the connector without pulling the cable. Pulling the cable with strong force can cause it to break.
0902YG220.book
83 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Change the orientation of the optical unit, and unplug the UCN10 connector from the CN10 connector on the PMU board.
UCN10
6
Rotate the optical unit 90° clockwise, and unplug the UCN7 and UCN11 connectors on the PMU board.
UCN7
UCN11
7 8
Pull out the photomultiplier tube filter assembly and remove it. Replace with a new photomultiplier tube filter assembly. Leave the photomultiplier tube filter assembly sticking out about 20 mm from the installation surface, as in Step 3.
9
Connect the cables removed in Step 6 to the PMU board. • Connector (UCN7) • Connector (UCN11) Connect the cables in the reverse order that they were removed.
5-83
0902YG220.book
84 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
10
Connect the cable removed in Step 5 to the CN10 connector on the PMU board. • Connector (UCN10) Connect the cables in the reverse order that they were removed.
11
Connect the cable removed in Step 4 to the PMU board.
• Connector (UCN8) Connect the cables in the reverse order that they were removed.
12
Install the photomultiplier tube filter assembly. • 4 screws (M4 x 12) Install the assembly in the reverse order that it was removed.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the photomultiplier tube filter assembly.
5-84
0902YG220.book
85 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.7
Replacing the Parts on the Eraser Unit 5.7.1
Replacing the Erase Lamp Unit (Halogen Lamp) See the section «6.2.5 Replacing the Erase Lamp (Halogen Lamp)» in the Operation Manual.
5.7.2
Replacing the Hot-Cathode Tube Lamp This section describes the instructions on how to replace the hot-cathode tube lamp.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 3)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with the light condensing unit up.
2
Remove the hot-cathode tube lamp.
3
Install the new hot-cathode tube lamp. Install it so the transparent face will be on the surface.
4
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the hot-cathode tube lamp.
5-85
0902YG220.book
86 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.7.3
Replacing the Halogen Lamp This section described the instructions on how to replace the halogen lamp on the erase lamp unit.
• Do not touch the erase lamp directly immediately after it is turned on so as not to burn Caution
yourself. • Wear glove when working with the lamp. The halogen lamp soiled with dirt or smear of your hand could be blown out in use.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements Shown below is the tool requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
Tool Glove
1 2
See the section «6.2.5 Replacing the Erase Lamp (Halogen Lamp)» in the Operation Manual to remove the erase lamp unit. Remove the halogen lamp cable connector (JP57).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
JP57
3
Remove the fixing board. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
5-86
0902YG220.book
87 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Slide the (five) filters to remove them.
5
Remove the reflector guide. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
6 7
Remove the halogen lamp. Install the new halogen lamp.
8
Install the reflector guide that was removed in Step 5. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
9 10
Install the (five) filters that were removed in Step 4. Install the fixing board that was removed in Step 3. • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
11 12
Connect the connector (JP57) that was removed in Step 2. See the section «6.2.5 Replacing the Erase Lamp (Halogen Lamp)» in the Operation Manual» to install the erase lamp unit.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the halogen Lamp.
5-87
0902YG220.book
88 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.8
Replacing the Parts on the Detach Detection Unit 5.8.1
Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Upper) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the detach detection sensor (upper).
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool
No.
Detach detection unit adjusting jig (Adjustment block, sensor status detection jig)
2
Tool Vinyl sheet (used for covering the light condensing unit to screen out dust on it)
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with the light condensing unit up.
2
Remove the detach detection sensor (upper). • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
JP54
Caution
3
The screw cannot be accessed straight. Be careful so as not to break down its screw hole.
Unplug the cable from the detach detection sensor (upper). • Connector (JP54)
4 5
Connect the cable to the new detach detection sensor (upper). Install the detach detection sensor (upper). • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
6 7
See «6.5 Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor (Page 6-12)» to adjust the sensor position. See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the detach detection sensor (upper).
5-88
0902YG220.book
89 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.8.2
Replacing the Detach Detection Sensor (Lower) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the detach detection sensor (lower).
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 14)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool
No.
Detach detection unit adjusting jig (Adjustment block, sensor status detection jig)
2
Tool Vinyl sheet (used for covering the light condensing unit to screen out dust on it)
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with the light condensing unit up.
2
Open the number 2 eraser cover. • 1 slotted head screw (M4 x 12)
3 4 5 JP55
See «5.8.3 Replacing the Detach Detection Roller» to remove the detach detection roller. Cover the optical unit with a vinyl sheet to screen out dust on it. Unplug the cable from the detach detection sensor (lower). • Connector (JP55)
6 Sensor Mount Board
Remove the setscrew from the sensor mount board. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 6)
5-89
0902YG220.book
90 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
7
Remove the roller retention lower unit assembly. • 2 screws (M3 x 6) To access the screws, slide the sensor mount board upward.
8
Disconnect the spring connected to the sensor mount board, from one end of the spring.
9
Remove the sensor mount board. • 2 screws (M3 x 6) • 1 guide spacer for each
10
Remove the detach detection sensor (lower). • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
11
12
Install the new detach detection sensor (lower).
See Step 9 and Step 8 to install the sensor mount board. • 2 screws (M3 x 6) • 1 guide spacer for each • Spring The setscrew removed in Step 6 will be installed later when the sensor position will be adjusted (Step 15).
13
Install the roller retention unit lower assembly that was removed in Step 7. • 2 screws (M3 x 6)
14 15 16
Install the detach detection roller that was removed in Step 3.
See «6.5 Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor (Page 6-12)» to adjust the roller and sensor positions. See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the detach detection sensor (lower).
5-90
0902YG220.book
91 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.8.3
Replacing the Detach Detection Roller This section describes the instructions on how to replace the detach detection roller.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • Be careful when handling the optical unit not to send a shock wave to it, that is composed of precision parts.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 3)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Detach detection unit adjusting jig (Adjustment block, sensor status detection jig)
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit. Place the removed optical unit in a level and stable place with the light condensing unit up.
2
Remove the E-rings to remove the detach detection roller. • 2 E-rings • 2 bearings
3
Install the new detach detection roller. • 2 E-rings • 2 bearings
4 5
See «6.5 Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor (Page 6-12)» to adjust the roller position. See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the detach detection roller.
5-91
0902YG220.book
92 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.9
Replacing the Parts on the Exterior 5.9.1
Replacing the Second Front Door Lock Mechanisms This section describes the instructions on how to replace the second front door lock mechanisms (the lock mechanism unit assembly in the door side and the locking pin unit assembly in the main unit side).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Door Side (Lock Mechanism Unit Assembly) Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1 2
Open the second front door. Remove the lock mechanism unit assembly. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
3
Install the new lock mechanism unit assembly. • 4 tapping screws (M4 x 10) Press it in a direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
4
Close the second front door.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the lock mechanism unit assembly.
5-92
0902YG220.book
93 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Main Unit Side (Locking Pin Unit Assembly)
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 10)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3 CN3
Remove all connectors from the PCU. • CN1 (PCN1: cable) • CN2 (PCN2: cable) • CN3 (PCN3: cable)
4
Remove the interlock switch cable connector (JJ10).
CN1 Caution
CN2
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
JJ10
5-93
0902YG220.book
94 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Remove the locking pin unit assembly. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
First Front Side
6
Replace the parts.
7
See Step 5 to install the locking pin unit assembly. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
8 Locking Lever
• Make sure that the locking lever on the second front
A
Sensor Dog
door is securely engaged to the locking shaft at the position A (two of upper and lower locations). If it is not, loosen the screws B to adjust the right and left sides, then fix the lever.
B D B
Close the second front door to adjust the locking pin position.
C
• B: 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x • Make sure that the sensor dog on the second front
A
D
door is set in the almost center of the slit in the switch mount bracket at the position C. If it is not, loosen the screws D to adjust the up and down sides, then fix the dog. • D: 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Locking Lever
9
Connect the connectors removed in Step 3 and Step 4. • PCU • CN1 (PCN1: cable) • CN2 (PCN2: cable) • CN3 (PCN3: cable) • Interlock switch cable (JJ10)
5-94
0902YG220.book
95 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
10
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
11
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the locking pin unit assembly.
5.9.2
Replacing the Interlock Switch This section describes the instructions on how to replace the interlock switch.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Remove the connector (JJ10).
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
JJ10
5-95
0902YG220.book
96 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Remove the interlock switch. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 15)
5
Blue
Disconnect the cable and connect it to the interlock switch.
6
Install the new interlock switch. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 15)
Brown
7
Connect the connector (JJ10) that was removed in Step 3.
8
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
9
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the interlock switch.
5.9.3
Replacing the Noise Filter and the Circuit Protector Unit This section describes the instructions on how to replace the noise filter and the circuit protector unit
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 14)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
5-96
Tool Wiring band
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
0902YG220.book
97 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the cooling fan connector (CN11) from the first front back side.
CN11
Caution
3
CIU
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the CIU connector (CN5). • CN5 (CCN5: cable)
CN5
First Front Back Side
4
Remove the connector (JP1) from the first front side.
Caution
5
JP1 First Front Side
Second Front Back Side
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the grounding cable from the second front side. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
6 B
Remove the exterior frame (right). • A: 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x • B: 14 screws (M4 x
B
Remove all screws.
B
A
B B Second Front Back Side
7
Remove the noise filter and the circuit protector unit assembly. • Noise filter • 2 screws (M4 x • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • Circuit protector unit assembly • 2 screws (M4 x
5-97
0902YG220.book
98 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
8 White
Replace the parts. • Circuit breaker cover
Black
• 1 screw (M4 x • Inlet • 2 screws (M3 x 6) Install the circuit protector (power supply circuit breaker) with the ON side up.
Blue Yellow
Install the inlet with the ground side facing to the left.
Black White
9
See Step 7 to install the locking pin unit assembly. • Noise filter • 2 screws (M4 x • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • Circuit protector unit assembly • 2 screws (M4 x Move the noise filter in the direction of the arrow in the figure and fix it.
Caution
10
After installing, make sure that circuit protector has been switched to OFF.
See Step 6 to install the exterior frame (right). • A: 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x • B: 12 screws (M4 x
11
See Step 5 to connect the grounding cable of the inlet to the frame.
• 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M5 x 10)
12 13
Connect the connector (JP1) that was removed in Step 4. Connect the CIU connector (CN5) that was removed in Step 3. • CN5 (CCN5: cable)
14 15
Connect the cooling fan connector (CN11) that was removed in Step 2.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the noise filter and the circuit protector unit.
5-98
0902YG220.book
99 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.9.4
Replacing the Capacitor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the capacitor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3 A
Remove the connectors in the figure to remove the cables secured to the halogen power supply unit assembly with the snap ties and the clamps.
A
CN2/HCN2 CN2/JP26 CN1/JP23
4 Interlock Relay 2 Lines
CN3/HCN3
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
• Ties • A: Snap ties (remove them) • Interlock relay 2 • 4 pieces
A
• Standby power supply • CN1 (JP23: cable) • CN2 (JP26: cable)
JJ1 JJ63
CN1/HCN1 JP1 First Front Side
• Halogen power supply • CN1 (HCN1: cable) • CN2 (HCN2: cable) • CN3 (HCN3: cable)
5-99
0902YG220.book
100 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
• Capacitor • JJ1A (JP1: cable) • JP1A (JJ1: cable) • Resistant Assy • JP63 (JJ63: cable)
4
Remove the halogen power supply unit assembly. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x • 2 screws (M4 x
First Front Side
5 6
Remove the bracket, then the capacitor. • 1 screw (M3 x 6) Install the new capacitor. • Bracket • 1 screw (M3 x 6)
7
Install the halogen power supply unit assembly that was removed in Step 4. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x • 2 screws (M4 x
8
Interlock relay 2 (Brown) MDU, etc.
(Blue) Digital Power Supply
(Brown) Interlock switch
(Black) Interlock relay 1, etc.
Connect the connectors removed in Step 3 and fix them using the snap ties and clamps. • Ties • Snap ties at 3 locations • Interlock relay 2 • 4 pieces (see the figure) • Standby power supply • CN1 (JP23: cable) • CN2 (JP26: cable) • Halogen power supply • CN1 (HCN1: cable) • CN2 (HCN2: cable) • CN3 (HCN3: cable) • Capacitor • JJ1A (JP1: cable) • JP1A (JJ1: cable) • Resistant Assy • JP63 (JJ63: cable)
5-100
0902YG220.book
101 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
9
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the capacitor.
5.9.5
Replacing Resistant Assy This section describes how to replace the resistant Assy.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
5-101
0902YG220.book
102 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3 A
Unplug the connector shown in the figure, and then unplug all the cables fixed to the halogen power supply by using snap ties and clamps.
A
CN2/HCN2 CN2/JP26 CN1/JP23
Caution
4 Interlock Relay 2 Lines
• Ties • A: Snap tie (remove it.) • Interlock relay 2 • 4 pieces • Standby power supply • CN1 (JP23: cable) • CN2 (JP26: cable) • Halogen power supply • CN1 (HCN1: cable) • CN2 (HCN2: cable) • CN3 (HCN3: cable) • Capacitor • JJ1A (JP1: cable) • JP1A (JJ1: cable • Resistant Assy • JP63 (JJ63: cable)
CN3/HCN3
A
JJ1 JJ63
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
CN1/HCN1 JP1 First Front Side
4
Remove the halogen power supply assembly. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x • 2 screws (M4 x
First Front Side
5
Remove the resistant Assy. • 2 screws (M2 x 6) • Snap tie at 1 location
6
Install a new resistant Assy. • 2 screws (M2 x 6) • Snap tie at 1 location
7
Install the halogen power supply assembly that was removed in Step 4. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x • 2 screws (M4 x
5-102
0902YG220.book
103 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
8
Interlock relay 2 (Brown) MDU, etc.
(Blue) Digital Power Supply
Plug and fix the connector that was removed in Step 3 by using snap ties and clamps. • Ties • Snap ties at 3 locations • Interlock relay 2 • 4 pieces (See the figure.) • Standby power supply • CN1 (JP23: cable) • CN2 (JP26: cable) • Halogen power supply • CN1 (HCN1: cable) • CN2 (HCN2: cable) • CN3 (HCN3: cable) • Capacitor • JJ1A (JP1: cable) • JP1A (JJ1: cable • Resistant Assy • JP63 (JJ63: cable)
(Brown) Interlock switch
(Black) Interlock relay 1, etc.
9
Install the electric component mount panel you removed at Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the resistant Assy
5.9.6
Replacing the Halogen Power Supply This section describes the instructions on how to replace the halogen power supply.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
5-103
0902YG220.book
104 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Unplug all the cables connected to the halogen power supply.
Caution
4
First Front Side
Remove the halogen power supply. • A: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x • Other than A: 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 12) • Other than A: 1 collar for each one
CN2
5
Install the new halogen power supply. • A: 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x • Other than A: 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 12) • Other than A: 1 collar for each one
A
6 CN3
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cables unplugged in Step 3 to the halogen power supply. • CN1 (HCN1: cable) • CN2 (HCN2: cable) • CN3 (HCN3: cable)
CN1
7
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the halogen power supply.
5-104
0902YG220.book
105 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.9.7
Replacing the PCU This section describes the instructions on how to replace the PCU.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Unplug all the cables connected to the PCU.
CN3 Caution
4 CN1
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the PCU. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 12) • 1 collar for each one Be careful not to drop and lose the collar.
CN2 Important
5
Install the new PCU. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 12) • 1 collar for each one
5-105
0902YG220.book
106 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
Connect the cables unplugged in Step 3 to the PCU. • CN1 (PCN1: cable) • CN2 (PCN2: cable) • CN3 (PCN3: cable)
7
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the PCU.
5.9.8
Replacing the Transformer Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 1) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the interlock relay 1.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 6)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
5-106
0902YG220.book
107 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the interlock relay 1. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
4 (Brown) Analog Power Supply, etc.
(Black) PCU
5
Unplug the cable and connect it to the new interlock relay 1. Install the new interlock relay 1. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
(Brown) Interlock Switch
(Black) Digital Power Supply, etc.
6
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
7
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the interlock relay 1.
5.9.9
Replacing the Standby Power Supply Unit Relay (Interlock Relay 2) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the interlock relay 2.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 6)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
5-107
0902YG220.book
108 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Remove the interlock relay 2. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
First Front Side
4 (Brwon) MDU, etc.
(Brown) Interlock Switch
5
Unplug the cable and connect it to the new interlock relay 1. Install the new interlock relay 2. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
(Black) Interlock (Blue) Digital Power Supply Relay 1, etc.
6
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
7
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the interlock relay 2.
5-108
0902YG220.book
109 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.9.10 Replacing the Standby Power Supply This section describes the instructions on how to replace the standby power supply.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 13)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Remove the snap tie (at 1 location) in the figure. The tie does not to be cut off.
4
Remove the interlock relay 2. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
First Front Side
5-109
0902YG220.book
110 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Unplug all the cables connected to the standby power supply. • CN1 (JP23: cable) • CN2 (JP26: cable)
CN2
CN1
6
Remove the circuit board mount bracket. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
7
Remove the standby power supply. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
8
Install the new standby power supply. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
9
See Step 6 to install the circuit board mount bracket. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
10
Connect the cables removed in Step 5 to the standby power supply. • CN1 (JP23: cable) • CN2 (JP26: cable)
11
Install the interlock relay 2 that was removed in Step 4.
• 2 screws (M4 x 6)
12 13
Install the snap ties that was removed in Step 3. Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
5-110
0902YG220.book
111 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
14
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the standby power supply.
5.9.11 Replacing the Analog Power Supply This section describes the instructions on how to replace the analog power supply.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Eject the analog power supply together with the bracket. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6) While ejecting the analog power supply as above, unplug the cables from it.
• CN1 (JP24: cable) • CN2 (JP27: cable) CN1 CN2
Caution
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
5-111
0902YG220.book
112 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Remove the analog power supply. • 2 screws (M3 x 6)
5
Install the bracket on the new analog power supply. • 2 screws (M3 x 6) Fix the bracket by moving it upward to the analog power supply.
6
Connect the cables removed in Step 3 to the analog power supply. • CN1 (JP24: cable) • CN2 (JP27: cable)
7
See Step 3 to install the bracket. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
8
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
9
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the analog power supply.
5.9.12 Replacing the Digital Power Supply This section describes the instructions on how to replace the digital power supply.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
5-112
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
0902YG220.book
113 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3
Unplug all the cables connected to the digital power supply.
Caution
CN2
4
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the digital power supply. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 15) • 1 circuit board spacer for each one (excluding the position A)
5
Install the new digital power supply. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 15) • 1 circuit board spacer for each one (excluding the position A)
6
Connect the cables removed in Step 3 to the digital power supply. • CN1 (JP22: cable) • CN2 (JP25: cable)
CN1 A
7
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the digital power supply.
5-113
0902YG220.book
114 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.9.13 Replacing the Transformer This section describes the instructions on how to replace the transformer.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • A transformer weighs about ??kg. When removing or installing the transformer or transformer unit assembly, be sure to hold it securely so as not to drop it.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
1
Tool Wiring band
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
5-114
0902YG220.book
115 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the connectors in the below figure to remove the cables secured to the transformer unit assembly with the wiring band and clamps. When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Caution
Removing the transformer unit assembly will remove the cables expressed with heavy lines in the figure, which are kept attached to the unit. Remove any other cable than the above, which is attached to the unit.
JJ3
CN2/JP25 C
JJ2
CN2/PCN2
JP49
Tap Switching Connector
A A
JJ21 A
A
B
B
A
CN2/JP27
JP10
2 Wires at Bottom of Interlock Relay 1
JJ1
CN1/HCN1
First Front Side
• Ties • A: wiring band (cut them off) • B: snap ties (cut them off) • C: snap ties (remove them) • Transformer cables • • • •
JJ1 (JP1A: cable) JP2 (CN2: cable) JJ3 (JP3: cable) JJ21 (tap switching connector) JJ21 must be removed from the clasp.
• PCU • CN2 (PCN2: cable) • Interlock switch • JJ10 (JP10: cable)
• Interlock relay 1 • 2 pieces in the lower side (left: brown, right: black)
• Digital power supply • CN2 (JP25: cable) • Digital power supply cooling fan cable • JP49 (JJ49: cable) • Analog power supply • CN2 (JP27: cable) • Halogen power supply • CN1 (HCN1: cable)
5-115
0902YG220.book
116 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Remove the transformer unit assembly. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
First Front Side
5
Remove the transformer. • 4 screws (M4 x 6)
6
Install the new transformer. • 4 screws (M4 x 6) Press it in a direction of the arrow shown in the figure to fix it.
7
See Step 4 to install the transformer unit assembly. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
8
Connect the connectors removed in Step 3 and fix them using the wiring band and clamps. • Connectors at 10 locations • 2 cables to the interlock relay 1
9
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the transformer.
5-116
0902YG220.book
117 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.9.14 Replacing the Digital Power Supply Cooling Fan This section describes the instructions on how to replace the digital power supply cooling fan.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3 JP49
Remove the digital power supply cooling fan cable connector (JP49).
Caution
4
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the fan bracket. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
First Front Side
5-117
0902YG220.book
118 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Remove the fan motor. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 20)
6
Install the new fan motor. • 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x 20)
7
See Step 4 to install the fan bracket. • 2 screws (M4 x 6)
8
Connect the connector (JP49) that was removed in Step 3. After connecting, fix the cable using the clamp and wiring band.
9
Install the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the power supply cooling fan.
5.9.15 Replacing the MDU Cooling Fan This section describes the instructions on how to replace the MDU cooling fan.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 11)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
5-118
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel.
0902YG220.book
119 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
2
Remove the bracket cover. • 1 screw (M4 x
First Front Back Side
3
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6)
B
Loosen all screws. • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
3
2
Remove the circuit board cover.
Remove all screws.
4
1
A
First Front Back Side
4
Remove the MDU connector (CN11).
Caution CN11
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
First Front Back Side
5
Remove the fan unit assembly. • 1 screw (M4 x
5-119
0902YG220.book
120 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
Remove the cooling fan. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 20)
7
Install the new cooling fan. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 20)
8
See Step 5 to install the fan unit assembly. • 1 screw (M4 x
9
Connect the connector (CN11) that was removed in Step 4.
10
Install the circuit board cover that was removed in Step 3. • A: 3 screws (M3 x 6) • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
11
Install the bracket cover that was removed in Step 2.
• 1 screw (M4 x
12
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the cooling fan.
5-120
0902YG220.book
121 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.10 Replacing the Parts on the Framework 5.10.1 Replacing the CIU This section describes the instructions on how to replace the CIU.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• See «5.2.7 Binding the Grounding Strap (Page 5-18)» to bind a grounding strap in order to protect the circuit board from damage due to static discharge.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 10)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel.
2
Remove the bracket cover. • 1 screw (M4 x
First Front Back Side
3
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6)
B
Loosen all screws. • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
3
2
Remove the circuit board cover.
Remove all screws.
4
A
1 First Front Back Side
5-121
0902YG220.book
122 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
4
Unplug all the cables connected to the CIU.
Caution
First Front Back Side CN1 CN11
5
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the CIU. • 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
6 7
Remove the CF card to install it on the new CIU. Install the new CIU. • 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
8
CF Card CN13
Connect the cables removed in Step 4 to the CIU. • • • •
CN5
9
CN1 (CCN1: cable) CN5 (CCN5: cable) CN11 (OCN11: cable) CN13 (CCN13: cable)
Install the circuit board cover that was removed in Step 3. • A: 3 screws (M3 x 6) • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
10
Install the bracket cover that was removed in Step 2. • 1 screw (M4 x
11
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the CIU.
5.10.2 Replacing the MDU This section describes the instructions on how to replace the MDU.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment. • See «5.2.7 Binding the Grounding Strap (Page 5-18)» to bind a grounding strap in order to protect the circuit board from damage due to static discharge.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
5-122
0902YG220.book
123 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel.
2
Remove the bracket cover. • 1 screw (M4 x
First Front Back Side
3
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6)
B
Loosen all screws.
• B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
3
2
Remove the circuit board cover.
Remove all screws.
4
1
A
First Front Back Side
4
Unplug all the cables connected to the MDU.
Caution First Front Back Side
5
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the MDU. • A: 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 12) • Other than A: 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
A
6
Install the new MDU. • A: 2 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 12)
CN6
Tighten the clamp together.
CN7
• Other than A: 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M3 x 6)
CN5 CN3 CN1 CN4 CN9 CN11
CN2 CN8
7
Connect the cables removed in Step 4 to the MDU. • • • • • • • • • •
CN1 (MCN1: cable) CN2 (MCN2: cable) CN3 (MCN3: cable) CN4 (MCN4: cable) CN5 (MCN5: cable) CN6 (MCN6: cable) CN7 (MCN7: cable) CN8 (MCN8: cable) CN9 (MCN9: cable) CN11 (MCN11: cable)
5-123
0902YG220.book
124 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
8
Install the circuit board cover that was removed in Step 3. • A: 3 screws (M3 x 6) • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
9
Install the bracket cover that was removed in Step 2. • 3 screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the MDU.
5.10.3 Replacing the CF Card This section describes the instructions on how to replace the CF card.
Before Replacing the CF Card Own various configuration data on the individual REGIUS MODEL 110 equipment is stored in each CF card. Therefore, data within the card must be backed up before replaced, then it must be restored in the new card after replaced. The service tools can be used to perform these works as above on the REGIUS console that is connected to the REGIUS MODEL 110 through networking.
Important
Replace the CF card when it is possibly malfunctioning. In most cases, a malfunction in the CF card will disable the REGIUS MODEL 110 to establish network connection, resulting in impossibility to perform data backup at this time. The CF card backup is one of the work items required when installing the equipment, however, backup must be performed whenever any setting is changed in the REGIUS MODEL 110 for the purpose of servicing or other purpose.
Work Procedures This section describes the procedures for the works required in order to replace the CF card. For operating the service tools, see the Installation/Service Manual for REGIUS console.
• Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• See «5.2.7 Binding the Grounding Strap (Page 5-18)» to bind a grounding strap in order to protect the circuit board from damage due to static discharge.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1*
Tool Ethernet cable (Category 5e or higher)
*: Cross cable can also be used.
5-124
No. 2*
Tool Network hub
0902YG220.book
125 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
1 2
If the equipment can communicate with the REGIUS console, back up data in the CF card and store it in the console in the «Change Circuit Board» screen of a service tool. Back up the own configuration data (system or JM information) on the REGIUS on the console on which backup of the CF card data has been performed. Subsequently, use this REGIUS console to restore the CF card data or configure the equipment (REGIUS MODEL 110).
3
Reset the settings in the REGIUS console to default (1:1 connect, post-register) Network address setting screen • IP address: 192.168.20.90 • Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 JOBINFO screen • Select «JobManager internal, post-register» CCU INFO screen • Host name: R170-0001 • Host name (on JobManager): r170-0001 • IP address: 192.168.20.170 PostgreSQL access tool • c_status: set to «CS#-0001» only • r_status: set to «r170-0001» only • relations: set to a single relation between «CS#-0001» and «r170-0001» only • sys_config: set to «1» (CS#: «CS1» for CS-1 or CS-3; «CS2» for CS2) Alternatively you can also initialize the JM settings using a service tool.
4 5
Exit the REGIUS console and the equipment and turn each power off. Replace the CF card. 1. See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front back panel. 2. Remove the circuit board cover.
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6)
B
Loosen all screws. • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
3
2
Remove all screws.
4
A
1 First Front Back Side
5-125
0902YG220.book
126 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3. Replace the CF card.
First Front Back Side
CF Card
4. Install the circuit board cover.
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6) • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20) 5. See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front back panel.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Disconnect the equipment and the REGIUS console from the network over the site to establish the peer-to-peer based connection. Turn both the REGIUS console and equipment powers on to get them started. In the «Network Configuration» screen of the service tool, re-set the settings to the values when network configuration was set up on the equipment (during operations at the site). Restore the settings in the REGIUS console that were backed up in Step 2. Connect the REGIUS console and the equipment to the network over the site. Make sure that all data was reset to the settings that were made during operations, excluding each compensation and Config data. In the «Change Circuit Board» screen of the service tool, restore the data backed up in Step 1 (or during installation/servicing) in the CF card. No Data to Restore If data in the CF card cannot be backed up and there is no data backed up during installation/servicing, perform the rechecking/readjustment procedures as described below:
• • • •
Checking the number of read pixels and the read position Adjusting the image size and position Unevenness calibration Sensitivity calibration
For performing each work, see the Installation/Service Manual for REGIUS console. After configuration is completed, perform backup of the CF card data.
Important
5-126
0902YG220.book
127 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
13
Restart the equipment. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the CF card.
5.10.4 Replacing the Transporter HP Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the Transporter HP sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1 2
Open the second front door. Check the position of the push plate unit. When the push plate is in vicinity to the read home position: See « If the insertion unit has not been removed: (page 5-17)» in «5.2.6 Moving the Push Plate Unit» to move the push plate unit to the read position (first front back side).
3
Remove the transporter HP sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
4
Unplug the cable from the transporter HP sensor. • Connector (JP46)
Caution JP46
Second Front Side
5 6
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cable to the new transporter HP sensor. Install the transporter HP sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
7
If the first front back panel was removed, see « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install it.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the transporter HP sensor.
5-127
0902YG220.book
128 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.10.5 Replacing the Transporter Read Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the transporter read sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1 2
Open the second front door. Check the position of the push plate unit. When the push plate is at the read position: See « If the insertion unit has not been removed: (page 5-17)» in «5.2.6 Moving the Push Plate Unit» to move the push plate unit in the vicinity of the read home position.
3
Remove the read position detection unit assembly. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 6)
4
Remove the connector (JP47).
Caution JP47
5
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Remove the transporter read sensor. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
6
Install the new transporter read sensor on the sensor bracket. • 1 screw (M4 x 15)
7 8
Connect the connector (JP47). Install the read position detection unit assembly that was removed in Step 3. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 6)
5-128
0902YG220.book
129 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
9
If the first front back panel was removed, see « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install it.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the transporter read sensor.
5.10.6 Replacing the Transporter Motor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the transporter motor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 18)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
1
Tool
1
Grease (Multemp AC-D)
3
Wiring band
No. 2
Tool Waste cloth (used for greasing)
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the exterior frame (back). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 9 screws (M4 x
First Front Back Side
5-129
0902YG220.book
130 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
First Front Back Side
3
Rotate the shaft clockwise and move the push plate unit to the vicinity of the transporter home position. This work is intended for the case that the push plate is at the read position. 1. Move the optical unit to the second front back side. 2. Rotate the shaft clockwise and move to the vicinity of the transporter home position.
4
5
Cut off the wiring band retaining the cable on the transporter motor unit assembly.
Remove the right side tumbler (upper). • 2 screws (M4 x
6
Remove the connector (JP52).
JP52
Caution
5-130
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
0902YG220.book
131 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
7
Remove the transporter unit assembly. • 4 screws (M4 x
First Front Back Side
8
Remove the transporter motor. • 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
9
Remove the gear. • 2 setscrews
10
Secure temporarily the gear to the new transporter motor. • 2 setscrews
11
See Step 8 to install the transporter motor on the bracket.
• 4 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Important
12
Make sure the connector is in the right direction when installing the motor.
Adjust the position of the gear and fix it. Fix the gear, positioning the Surface A shown in the figure.
A
5-131
0902YG220.book
132 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
13
See Step 7 to install the transporter motor unit assembly. • 4 screws (M4 x
Important
14
Make sure that the grounding plate contacts the motor. If not, make the bend of the grounding plate strong. (To do so easily, remove the grounding plate.)
Connect the connector (JP52) that was removed in Step 6.
15
Install the right side tumbler (upper) that was removed in Step 5. • 2 screws (M4 x
16 Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism
See Step 4 to secure the cable to the transporter unit assembly with the wiring band.
17
Apply grease to the transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. • Grease: Multemp AC-D Always use the specified grease.
Important Apply grease on entire area by turning the transporter lead screw using a screw driver.
18
Install the exterior frame (back) that was removed in Step 2.
• Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 9 screws (M4 x
19
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the transporter motor.
5.10.7 Replacing the Back Plate Absorption Detection Sensor This section describes the instructions on how to replace the back plate absorption detection sensor.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number 1
5-132
Work Hours (steps 2 to
0902YG220.book
133 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel.
2
Remove the spring from the bracket assembly on the back plate detection unit.
First Front Back Side
3 4 JP48
5
Press the bracket assembly to lay it down. Remove the back plate absorption detection sensor. Unplug the cable from the back plate absorption detection sensor. • Connector (JP48)
Caution
First Front Back Side
6 7 8 9
When removing the connector, hold a notch on the connector without pulling a cable. Giving a strong pull to the cable may cause it to be broken.
Connect the cable to the new back plate absorption detection sensor. Install the back plate absorption detection sensor. Install the spring that was removed in Step 2 on the bracket assembly.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the back plate absorption detection sensor.
5.10.8 Replacing the Brush (Cleaning Unit) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the brush (cleaning unit).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
5-133
0902YG220.book
134 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1 2
Open the second front door. Remove the brush assembly. • 3 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
3
Install the new brush assembly. • 3 tapping screws (M4 x 10)
Second Front Side
4
Close the second front door.
Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the brush (cleaning unit).
5.10.9 Replacing the Tumbler (Upper) This section describes the instructions on how to replace the tumbler (upper).
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 4)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
First Front Back Side Top
2
Rotate the shaft clockwise and move the push plate unit to the vicinity of the transporter home position. This work is intended for the case that the push plate is at the read position. 1. Move the optical unit to the second front back side. 2. Rotate the shaft clockwise and move to the vicinity of the transporter home position.
5-134
0902YG220.book
135 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3
Remove the tumbler (upper). • 2 screws for each one (M4 x
4
Install the new tumbler (upper). • 2 screws for each one (M4 x
Important
5
Make sure that it is able to receive the push plate unit (as shown in the figure) after installing it.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the tumbler (upper).
5.10.10Replacing the Back Plate Detection Unit This section describes the instructions on how to replace the back plate detection unit.
Caution
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 9)
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the first font back panel.
2
Remove the spring from the bracket assembly on the back plate detection unit.
First Front Back Side
5-135
0902YG220.book
136 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
3 4
5
Press the bracket assembly to lay it down. Remove the back plate absorption detection sensor.
Remove the back plate detection unit assembly. • 1 screw (M4 x
6
Replace the parts. The spring will be installed later in Step 9 after installed on the main unit.
7
See Step 5 to install the back plate detection unit. • 1 screw (M4 x
8 9 10
Install the back plate absorption detection sensor that was removed in Step 4. See Step 2 to install the spring on the back plate detection unit.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front back panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the back plate detection unit.
5-136
0902YG220.book
137 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5.10.11Replacing the Cleaning Unit This section describes the instructions on how to replace the cleaning unit. Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
Caution
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to
1
Requirements The works in this section can be performed using only the standard tools.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the exterior panel and insertion unit.
2
Remove the exterior frame (front). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
3 4 B
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-10)» in «5.2.4 Removing/Installing the Second Front Door» to remove the second front door. Remove the exterior frame (left). • A: 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x • B: 13 screws (M4 x
B
Remove all screws.
B A
Second Front Side B
5-137
0902YG220.book
138 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
5
Replace the cleaning unit assembly. Upper Part
B
B A
B
• A: tapping screw (M4 x 10) • B: tapping screw (M3 x Left Side
C C C
C
D
• C: screw (M3 x 6) • D: tapping screw (M4 x 10)
5-138
139 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 5 Disassembly and Assembly
6
Adjust the wire tension. Make sure that the clearance between the cushion rubber on the brush unit and the subscan base is a value from 0 to 0.5 mm as a result of a visual inspection. Loosen the setscrew on the roller in the upper right side and move it upward and downward to adjust the tension.
0㨪0.5mm
0902YG220.book
After adjustment, move the knob to check the brush unit for normal operation.
Second Front Side
7
See Step 4 to install the exterior frame (left). • A: 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x • B: 13 screws (M4 x
8 9
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-10)» in «5.2.4 Removing/Installing the Second Front Door» to install the second front panel. Install the exterior frame (front) that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x
10
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the insertion unit and exterior panel. Now, you have finished with the procedures to replace the cleaning unit.
5-139
0902YG220.book
140 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 6
6
Adjustment How to adjust each units, which is necessary in repair/maintenance is described here.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
Adjust Justifier Belt Tension ………………………….6-2 Adjust Receiver Belt Tension ………………………..6-4 Adjustment of Justifier Motor ………………………..6-6 Adjust Wire Tension …………………………………..6-10 Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor ……………………………………………6-12 Adjustment of Pressing Amount…………………..6-15
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
6.1
Adjust Justifier Belt Tension Adjust the tension of the timing belt for the justifier mechanism in the receiver unit.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 5)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
Tool Acoustic wave tension meter
Positioning and adjustment parts for timing belt
Justifier Motor Unit Assembly
Timing Belt
Adjustment method
Caution
1
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you adjust the unit position of the equipment.
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
First Front Side
2
Measure the belt tension. Strike around the center of the belt, and measure the vibration noise toward the end of the belt. See «8.5 Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter (Page 8-16)» for how to use the acoustic wave tension meter. Specified value is following. Perform the adjustment according to Step 3 — Step 5 if it is out of range.
6-2
Specified value
Tension: 15.8 ± 2 N
Confirmation method
Acoustic wave tension meter Input data • Weight (MASS): 1.3g/m • Width: 6.0mm • Span: 418mm
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
Setscrew
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the justifier motor unit assembly. • 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
Adjustable Screw
4
• 2 hexagon socket head bolts (M4 x 20) • 1 hexagon nut each
Adjustable Screw Setscrew
Adjust by turning the adjustment screw so the tension is within the specified value.
5
Fix the justifier motor unit assembly by tightening the fixing screws. • 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
6
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel.
6-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
6.2
Adjust Receiver Belt Tension Adjust the tension of the timing belt for the receiver mechanism in the receiver unit.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
Tool Acoustic wave tension meter
Positioning and adjustment parts for timing belt
Timing Belt Receiver Idler Pulley Unit Assembly
Adjustment method
Caution
1
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you adjust the unit position of the equipment.
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2
Remove the electric component mount panel. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
6-4
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
3
Measure the belt tension. Strike around the center of the belt, and measure the vibration noise toward the end of the belt. See «8.5 Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter (Page 8-16)» for how to use the acoustic wave tension meter. Specified value is following. Perform the adjustment according to Step 4 — Step 6 if it is out of range.
4 Adjustable Screw Setscrew Setscrew
Specified value
Tension: 44 ± 4 N
Confirmation method
Acoustic wave tension meter Input data • Weight (MASS): 2.5g/m • Width: 9.0mm • Span: 507mm
Loosen the fixing screws of the receiver idler pulley unit assembly. • 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
5
Adjust by turning the adjustment screw so the tension is within the specified value. • 1hexagon socket head bolt (M4 x 20) • 1 hexagon nut
6
Fix the receiver idler pulley unit assembly by tightening the fixing screws. • 3 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
7
Attach the electric component mount panel that was removed in Step 2. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 8 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x
8
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel.
6-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
6.3
Adjustment of Justifier Motor Adjust the justifier (distance justifier guide moves to fix the cassette) after replacing the justifier mechanism (justifier motor, justifier guide, justifier belt, etc.).
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 11)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
Tool
No.
Standard cassette (14 x 14 inches)
2
Tool Interlock release key
Adjustment method • Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the Caution
equipment whenever you disassemble/assemble the equipment.
• When operating inside the equipment with interlock released and power ON, be aware against the electrification and pinching.
1
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to remove the first front panel.
2 3
Insert the interlock release key into the interlock switch. Turn the power ON.
Second Front Side
4
Start the service tool and display the [Adjustment] panel in [Unit Test] screen. Current value right after the «Adjustment» panel was displayed is in the «Amount of Important Justification».
6-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
5 6
Select «14 x 14 inch» for the «Cassette Type». Click the [Initialization] button for the [Adjustment of Justifier Motor]. Initialization process will be performed, and will wait for the cassette to be inserted. The message, «Uploading…» will continue to be displayed.
7
Set the standard cassette (14 x 14 inches) into the insertion slot. Shutter will open and the cassette will be loaded.
Caution
8
Do not do anything that is not described until you take out the cassette in Step 12. Equipment may be damaged by the drive unit and cassette contacting each other when wrong operation is performed.
Click the [Position of Justification] button. The standard cassette is fixed by the justifier guide.
6-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
9
Confirm the step in the justifier guide 2 while the cassette is fixed with the justifier guide. If the left edge of the justifier guide 1 is between the position of the A and B of the justifier guide 2, it is within the specification, and there is not need for adjustment of the current justifier. Go to Step 11 if you do not need to change the Amount of Justification. Measurement
Step between the justifier guide 2 and the justifier guide 1 when the standard cassette is fixed by justifier mechanism
Specified value
2 ± 0.3 mm
Justifier Guide 2
Justifier Guide 1
1.7mm 2.3mm Justifier Guide 2
A B
Justifier Guide 1
10
Change the justifier value if the step is not within specification, and reconfirm.
1. Click the [Move To HP] button. 2. Change the amount of justification. Justifier 2 to the right
Justifier 1 to the right
3. Click the [Position of Justification] button. 4. Confirm the step of the justifier guide 2 again. Repeat until the step come within the specified value.
6-8
0902YG220.book
9 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
11
Click the [Fix and Ejection] button once the step is within the specified value. Selected amount of justification will be set.
Important
12
Eject the cassette from the insertion slot.
Caution
13 14 15 16
Adjustment amount of the last justifier operation performed will be set. Always perform the justifier operation with the value to set before clicking on the [Fix and Ejection] button.
Do not perform any operation to exit the service tool, such as pressing the [Back] button or the [Initialization] button, before ejecting the cassette. A faulty operation may cause the drive to contact the cassette, resulting in the equipment damaged.
End the service tool. Turn the power OFF. Pull out the interlock release key.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the first front panel.
6-9
0902YG220.book
10 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
6.4
Adjust Wire Tension Adjust the tension of the wire in the subscan unit.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 7)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
Tool Acoustic wave tension meter
Positioning and adjustment parts for wire
Wire Retaining Plate
Wire
Adjustment method
Caution
1
Be sure to turn off the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever you adjust the unit position of the equipment.
See « Removal Procedures (page 5-6)» of the «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit», and remove the second font back panel.
2
Move the optical unit to the second front side and fix it using the simple fixing lock.
Note
6-10
When the optical unit moves all the way toward the front, fixing shaft will automatically lower to lock.
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
3
Measure the wire tension. Strike the wire around the center of the belt using ball of a finger, and measure the vibration noise toward the edge of the wire. Do not strike the wire with your fingernail.
Caution See «8.5 Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter (Page 8-16)» for how to use the acoustic wave tension meter.
Second Front Back Side
Specified value is following.Perform the adjustment according to Step 4 — Step 6 if it is out of range.
4
Specified value
Tension: 30 ± 5 N
Confirmation method
Acoustic wave tension meter Input data • Weight (MASS): 1.4 g/m • Width: 1.0 mm • Span: 555 mm
Loosen the fixing screws of the wire holding assembly. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x 12)
Adjustable Screw Setscrew
5
Adjust by turning the adjustment screw so the tension is within the specified value. • 1 screw (M4 x 12)
6
Fix the wire holding assembly by tightening the fixing screw. • 1 hex/Phillips-head screw (M4 x 12)
7
Release the simple fixing lock. Lock will be released by pulling up the blue knob.
Important
8
Push the optical unit slightly towards the back when pulling up the knob. Fixing shaft might move down, and get locked again if the optical unit is at its hithermost position. Also, move the optical unit to confirm that the fixing shaft is not lowered after unlocking.
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-8)» in «5.2.3 Removing/Installing the Exterior Panel and Insertion Unit» to install the second front back panel.
6-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
6.5
Adjust Position of Detach Detection Roller/Sensor Adjust the positions of the detach detection roller and sensor when assembling the detach detection unit.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours (steps 2 to 12)
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No. 1
Tool Detach the detection unit adjusting jig (Adjustment block, sensor status detection jig)
No.
Tool
2
Maintenance PC Or power outlet to USB adapter It will be used as power supply for the sensor status detection jig.
Position and adjustment parts for the detach detection roller/sensor
Sensor Fixing Plate Top Detach Detection Sensor
Detach Detection Roller
Bottom Roller Support Plate Sensor Fixing Plate Bottom Detach Detection Sensor
Top Roller Support Plate Adjustment block
Reference Plane
A B
C
D
There are 4 steps in the adjustment block: A: Plane where roller should not touch B: Plane where roller touch (sensor is OFF) C: Plane where sensor goes ON D: Plane to place on the standard plane Standard plane is the 3 locations at the side of the hot-cathode tube lamp attachment unit. Adjust at the top and bottom locations, and confirm at the center area with the roller rotating.
6-12
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
Sensor status detection jig
To USB Connector Detach Detection Sensor Top Detach Detection Sensor Bottom
1 2
To Detach Detection Sensor Sensor status detection jig will display the status of the sensor with the lamp by directly connecting it to the detach detection sensor. No. 1
Function Display the status of the connected detach detection sensor.
• Light on: ON (transparent) • Light off: OFF (opaque) 2
It will light up on power ON.
• It has a buzzer that will go on when ON is detected on both sensors. It will be in same Note
1
condition and the buzzer will sound when the sensors are not connected, so if you do want it to buzz when connecting the cables, connect the sensor cables before connecting the USB cable. • You can switch the buzzer ON or OFF by using the built-in switch.
Adjustment method See « Removal Procedures (page 5-11)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to remove the optical unit.
2 3
Remove the hot-cathode tube lamp. Open the number 2 eraser cover. • 1 slotted head screw (M4 x 12)
6-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
Adjust the roller position
Adjustment Block
A B
Adjust the roller position by performing Step 4 — Step 6 at the top and bottom of the roller.
C
4
D
Adjust the roller position by turning the adjustment screw (E in the figure) so it will touch B of the adjustment block.
Top Side
F
5
• 1 each hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 25) • 1 hexagon nut each Confirm that it is not touching A of the adjustment block.
6
Fix it by tighten the hex nut of the adjustment screw (E in the figure).
G
E
Important
7
Bottom Side
Be careful that the adjustment screw do not turn when tightening the hex nut.
Turn the roller and confirm that the roller does not touch A of the adjustment block in the center part. Continue with the adjustment of the sensor position.
Adjust the sensor position
8
F E G
9
Loosen the fixing screw (F in the figure) for the sensor mount board. • 1 each hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 6) Remove the cables from the sensor, and connect the sensor status detection jig.
10
Connect the USB cable from the sensor status detection jig.
11
Adjust the position of the sensor mount board by turning the adjustment screw (G in the figure) so the sensor will come ON when C of the adjustment block is touching the roller.
• 1 each hex/Phillips-head screw (M3 x 25) • 1 hexagon nut each
12
Also confirm that the sensor is OFF with B of the adjustment block.
Fix each sensor mount board by tightening the fixing screw (F in the figure) after adjusting the sensor position.
Important
13 14
Be careful not to shift the adjusted position while fixing.
Close the number 2 eraser cover once the adjustments are finished. • 1 slotted head screw (M4 x 12) Install the hot-cathode tube lamp that was removed in Step 2. Attach it so the transparent face will be on the surface.
15 6-14
See « Installation Procedures (page 5-14)» in «5.2.5 Removing/Installing the Optical Unit» to install the optical unit.
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
6.6
Adjustment of Pressing Amount Adjust the pressing amount (distance of the push plate unit moves to absorb the back plate of the cassette) when the transporter mechanism (transporter motor, etc.) is replaced.
Note
If the purpose is just to confirm the press down, it can be done by using the step operation (sequence of operation from insertion to eject of the cassette) in the service tool. See «4.4 Confirming by Step Operation (Page 4-8)» for the procedure to operate the step operation.
Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements Shown below are the tools requiring to be prepared in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
Tool
1
Press down size adjusting jig
3
Interlock release key
No. 2
Tool Standard cassette (14 x 17 inches)
Adjustment method
Caution
When operating inside the equipment with interlock released and power ON, be aware against the electrification and pinching.
1
Insert the interlock release key into the interlock switch.
Second Front Side
2
Start the service tool and display the [Adjustment] panel in [Unit Test] screen.
Important
Current value right after the «Adjustment» panel was displayed is in the «Pressing Amount».
6-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
3
4
Click the [Initialization] button for the [Adjustment of Pressing Amout].
Set the standard cassette facing toward the magnet (push plate) on the receiver. The shutter opens. The cassette is loaded. Do not do anything that is not described until you take out the cassette in Step 9. Caution Equipment may be damaged by the drive unit and cassette contacting each other when wrong operation is performed.
5
Second Front Side
6
Click the [Pressing Position] button.
Confirm if it is possible to slide in the press down adjustment jig in-between the push plate and the shaft. Slide in the jig along the indentation of the plate as shown in the figure. OK: Can insert.
NG: Cannot insert.
Insertion direction
Status of press down
5㨪5.5mm
6-16
Thin
Thick
OK
OK
Press down is weak
OK
NG
Appropriate
0902YG220.book
17 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
Insertion direction Thin
Thick
NG
NG
Status of press down
Press down is strong
It is in following specified value if it is appropriate. Measurement
Distance between the push plate and the shaft when the press down is performed on the 14 x 17 inch cassette
Specified value
5 — 5.5 mm
Go to Step 8 if you do not need to change the Pressing Amount.
7
Change the value for the press down if the distance between the push plate and the shaft is not within the specified value, and reconfirm.
1. Click the [Move To HP] button. 2. Change the pressing amount.
• To make pressing stronger, change the amount to the + side. • To make pressing weaker, change the amount to the side.
3. Click the [Pressing Position] button. 4. Confirm if the press down adjustment jig can be inserted again. Repeat until the distance come within the specified value.
Note
8
There are around 0.15 mm error in the push down.
Click the [Fix and Ejection] button once the distance is within the specified value. Selected pressing amount will be set.
Important
Adjustment amount of the last pressing operation performed will be set. Always perform the pressing operation with the value to set before clicking on the [Fix and Ejection] button.
6-17
0902YG220.book
18 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 6 Adjustment
9
Eject the cassette from the insertion slot. Do not perform any operation to exit the service tool, such as pressing the [Back] Caution button or the [Initialization] button, before ejecting the cassette. A faulty operation may cause the drive to contact the cassette, resulting in the equipment damaged.
10 11
6-18
End the service tool. Pull out the interlock release key.
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 7
7
Periodic Maintenance Method for the periodic maintenance of the equipment is described here.
7.1 7.2
Maintenance Schedule ………………………………..7-2 Maintenance Performed Annually………………….7-3
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.1
Maintenance Schedule Perform the maintenance according to the following schedule.
Maintenance Performed by User Description of Maintenance Work
Maintenance Period
Cleaning REGIUS cassette
1 week
Cleaning cassette insertion slot Cleaning exterior of the equipment
1 month
Cleaning air intake
3 month
Replacing erase lamp (halogen lamp) Cleaning dust from optical unit
Every 30,000 shots When vertical streak occur
See the Instruction Manual for detail.
Maintenance by the Maintenance Service Person Description of Maintenance Work
Maintenance Period
Cleaning of the brushes (3 locations) Cleaning cassette absorption magnet Greasing LM guide Greasing transporter lead screw unit Greasing transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism
1 year
Greasing of release shaft holder Greasing justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism Check for fallen foreign objects See «7.2 Maintenance Performed Annually (Page 7-3)» for the maintenance procedure.
7-2
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2
Maintenance Performed Annually Work outline Listed below are the number of people and the rough standard of work hours required for performing the works described in this section. Personnel Number
Work Hours
1
Requirements Following are the supplies and tools required in addition to the standard tools before performing the works in this section. No.
7.2.1
Supplies, tools
Note
1
Alcohol
For cleaning the cassette absorption plate
2
Grease (For LM guide)
AFC grease by THK
3
Grease (For all parts except LM guide)
Multemp AC-D
4
Grease gun
Model name: MG70
5
Glove
Use when handing the erase lamp unit.
6
Rag
For cleaning the magnet shaft
7
Rag
For cleaning the cassette absorption plate
8
Rag
For applying grease
9
Vacuum cleaner (portable)
For cleaning the brush
Workflow Following are the flow of the maintenance performed annually. Item
Description
Power OFF
Turn the power supply circuit breaker OFF and unplug the power cable and the Ethernet cable. See «7.2.2 Power OFF (Page 7-5)» for description.
Secure the maintenance space
Move the equipment to a place capable of performing the maintenance. See «7.2.3 Secure the Maintenance Space (Page 7-6)» for description.
Attachment of exterior panels and the insertion unit
Remove the exterior panels and the insertion unit to access the maintenance area. See «7.2.4 Removal of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit (Page 7-7)» for description.
7-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
Item Cleaning brush Check for fallen foreign objects
Clean the brush (cleaning unit, eraser unit, and toppling prevention block) and the magnet shaft. Also, confirm if any foreign object has fallen into the equipment. See «7.2.5 Cleaning Brush and Check for Fallen Foreign Objects (Page 7-9)» for description.
Cleaning cassette absorption magnet
Clean the surface of the magnet on the cassette absorption plate. See «7.2.6 Cleaning Cassette Absorption Magnet (Page 7-10)» for description.
Greasing LM guide
Grease the LM guide using a grease for metal. See «7.2.7 Greasing LM Guide (Page 7-11)» for description.
Greasing transporter lead screw unit
Apply grease to the transporter lead screw unit and the transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. See «7.2.8 Greasing Transporter Lead Screw Unit and Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Unit (Page 7-12)» for description.
Greasing transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism
Greasing of release shaft holder
Apply grease to the release shaft holder. See «7.2.9 Greasing of Release Shaft Holder (Page 7-13)» for description.
Greasing justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism
Apply grease to the justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. See «7.2.10 Greasing Justifier Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism (Page 7-13)» for description.
Attachment of exterior panels and the insertion unit
Attach the removed exterior panels and insertion slot unit. See «7.2.11 Attachment of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit (Page 714)» for description.
Move to the installed location
Move the equipment back to the installed location if it was moved. See «7.2.12 Move to the Installed Location (Page 7-16)» for description.
Power ON
Connect the Ethernet cable and power cable and turn ON the power. See «7.2.13 Power ON (Page 7-16)» for description.
Maintenance finished
7-4
Description
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.2
Power OFF Turn the power supply circuit breaker OFF and unplug the power cable and the Ethernet cable.
1 2
4’#&; operation
Confirm that REGIUS MODEL 110 is not operating. Press the «operation» switch for 3 seconds. Shutdown action will take place and «operation» lamp will turn off when completed.
erase
«operation» Switch
3
4 5
Turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker.
Unplug the power cable from the equipment and the power outlet. Unplug the Ethernet cable.
Important
Place the unplugged power cable and Ethernet cable in a place where they will not be stepped on while servicing.
Second Front Back Side This completes the Power OFF procedure. Go to «7.2.3 Secure the Maintenance Space (Page 7-6)» and secure the maintenance space.
7-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.3
Secure the Maintenance Space If the maintenance procedure is difficult to perform at the installation site, move the equipment to a place capable of performing the maintenance.
1
Move the optical unit to the second front side and fix it using the simple fixing lock. • When the optical unit moves all the way Note
2
3
Over 600 mm
Loosen the adjuster (4 locations).
Move the equipment to a place capable of operation. Secure a space of 600 mm around each side of the equipment.
Over 600 mm
Over 600 mm
toward the front, fixing shaft will automatically lower to lock. • The second front door that is locked with the simple fixing lock cannot be fully closed. (for the purpose of preventing the unit from being left locked).
Over 600 mm
4 5
Fix the equipment so it will not move using the adjuster (4 location) after moving it. Release the simple fixing lock. Lock will be released by pulling up the blue knob.
Important
Push the optical unit slightly towards the back when pulling up the knob. Fixing shaft might move down, and get locked again if the optical unit is at its hithermost position. Also, move the optical unit to confirm that the fixing shaft is not lowered after unlocking.
This completes the securing of the maintenance space. Go to «7.2.4 Removal of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit (Page 7-7)» to remove the exterior panels and the insertion unit.
7-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.4
Removal of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit Remove the exterior panels and the insertion unit to access the maintenance area.
1
Remove the second front back panel. • 6 screws (M4 x • 1 spacer each (for 4 locations excluding the middle)
Second Front Back Side
2
Remove the first front back panel. • 7 screws (M4 x Remove the panel with both hands, holding on the bottom and pulling away from the equipment.
First Front Back Side
3
Remove the first front panel. • 6 screws (M4 x Remove the panel with both hands, holding on the bottom and pulling away from the equipment.
First Front Side
4
• A: 3 screws (M3 x 6)
B
Loosen all screws.
• B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
3
2
Remove the circuit board cover.
Remove all screws.
4
A
1 First Front Back Side
7-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
5
• CN1 (MCN1: cable) • CN2 (MCN2: cable)
CN1 MDU
Remove the connectors from the MDU, and remove the cable from the wire saddle.
CN2
First Front Back Side
6
Remove the screws from the insertion unit. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M5 x 10)
7
Remove the insertion unit. Place the removed insertion unit upside down to prevent any damage inside, on a stable location.
Caution
Remove the unit carefully so the cables disconnected in Step 5 do not get caught.
This completes the procedure to remove the exterior panels and the insertion unit. Go to «7.2.5 Cleaning Brush and Check for Fallen Foreign Objects (Page 7-9)» and clean the brush.
7-8
0902YG220.book
9 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.5
Cleaning Brush and Check for Fallen Foreign Objects Clean the brush (cleaning unit, eraser unit, and toppling prevention block) and the magnet shaft. Also, confirm if any foreign object has fallen into the equipment.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever the maintenance is performed.
1 2 3
4
Open the second front door. Remove dust on the brush in the cleaning unit using a vacuum cleaner. Remove dust on the toppling prevention block using a vacuum cleaner.
Remove dust on the dust removal brush in the eraser unit using a vacuum cleaner.
Caution
Use the glove while working so there will be no oil from hand contaminating the filters on the eraser lamp unit.
1. See the section «6.2.5 Replacing the Erase Lamp (Halogen Lamp)» in the Operation Manual» to remove the erase lamp unit. 2. Remove dust on the dust removal brush using a vacuum cleaner. 3. Attach the eraser lamp unit.
5
Confirm there is no foreign object in the equipment. Remove it if there is any. If possible, give client an advice to be alert.
6
Clean the magnet shaft of the subscan unit. Wipe off the grim from the magnet shaft using a rag dampened with a water and squeezed tightly.
This completes the cleaning of the brush and confirmation of the foreign objects. Go to «7.2.6 Cleaning Cassette Absorption Magnet (Page 7-10)» and clean the surface of the magnet surface of the cassette absorption plate.
7-9
0902YG220.book
10 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.6
Cleaning Cassette Absorption Magnet Clean the surface of the magnet on the cassette absorption plate.Confirm that the surface of the cassette absorption plate is free of scratches and flat at the same time.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever the maintenance is performed.
1 2
Open the second front door. Wipe the surface (magnet face) of the cassette absorption plate lightly with alcohol. Confirm that it is free of scratches and flat at the same time.
Caution
Important
Be careful not to distort the cassette absorption plate with too much force.
Replacement of the transporter unit (at the factory) will be necessary if there is a scratch on the surface of the cassette absorption plate or if it is not flat.
This completes the cleaning of the cassette absorption magnet. Go to «7.2.7 Greasing LM Guide (Page 7-11)» and grease the LM guide.
7-10
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.7
Greasing LM Guide Grease the LM guide using a grease for metal.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever the maintenance is performed.
1
Grease the LM guide using a grease gun. There are grease nipples at the front and back of the holding plate of the subscan unit. Grease by moving the subscan unit (optical unit).
• Grease: AFC grease by THK • Grease gun model name: MG70 • Grease gun discharge rate: ca 60 cc/stroke Pull the lever on grease gun twice per each location.
Second Front Back Side
Always use the specified grease.
Important
Important
Wipe off the rust if you find any rust on the LM guide.
Second Front Side This completes the greasing procedure for the LM guide. Go to «7.2.8 Greasing Transporter Lead Screw Unit and Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Unit (Page 7-12)» and apply grease to the transporter lead screw unit and the transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit.
7-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.8
Greasing Transporter Lead Screw Unit and Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Unit Apply grease to the transporter lead screw unit and the transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever the maintenance is performed.
1
Move the optical unit to the second front back side. Note
2
It is necessary to move the optical unit to the second front back side when moving the push plate unit of the transporter unit (procedure to turn the transporter lead screw).
Remove the exterior frame (back). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 9 screws (M4 x
First Front Back Side Transporter Lead Screw Unit
3
Apply grease to the transporter lead screw unit and the transporter motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. • Grease: Multemp AC-D Always use the specified grease.
Important Apply grease on entire area by turning the transporter lead screw by a screw driver.
Transporter Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism
7-12
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
4
Attach the exterior frame (back). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 9 screws (M4 x
This completes the greasing the transporter lead screw unit and the transporter motor unit assembly fear mechanism unit. Go to «7.2.9 Greasing of Release Shaft Holder (Page 7-13)» and apply grease to the release shaft holder.
7.2.9
Greasing of Release Shaft Holder Apply grease to the release shaft holder.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever the maintenance is performed.
1
Apply grease to the release shaft holder. • Grease: Multemp AC-D
Application Point
Always use the specified grease.
Important
This completes the greasing procedure for the release shaft holder. Go to «7.2.10 Greasing Justifier Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism (Page 7-13)» and apply grease to the justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism.
7.2.10 Greasing Justifier Motor Unit Assembly Gear Mechanism Apply grease to the justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply circuit breaker and unplug the power cable from the equipment whenever the maintenance is performed.
1
Remove the exterior frame (front). • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x Loosen all screws.
First Front Side
7-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
2
Apply grease to the justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. • Grease: Multemp AC-D Always use the specified grease.
A
Important Apply grease on entire area by turning A.
First Front Side
3
Attach the exterior frame (front) that was removed in Step 1. • Grounding cable: 1 screw (M4 x • 4 screws (M4 x
This completes the greasing procedure for the justifier motor unit assembly gear mechanism unit. Go to «7.2.11 Attachment of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit (Page 7-14)» and attach the removed exterior panels and insertion slot unit.
7.2.11 Attachment of Exterior Panels and Insertion Unit Attach the removed exterior panels and insertion slot unit after completion of the maintenance.
1
Attach the insertion unit to the equipment. • 5 hex/Phillips-head screws (M4 x Tighten the screws in the following order: 1. Tighten three screws loosely on the first front side. 2. Tighten a screw firmly on the second front side. 3. Tighten the three screws firmly that have been loosened on the first front side. 4. Tighten a screw on the back of the second front side firmly.
Caution
Take care of the cable routing and not to pinch the cable.
First Front Side
2 CN1 MDU
CN2
First Front Back Side
7-14
Connect the cables on the insertion unit to the MDU, and then put the cables through the wire saddle. • MCN1 → CN1 (MDU) • MCN2 → CN2 (MDU)
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
3
Attach the circuit board cover. • A: 3 screws (M3 x 6) • B: 3 screws (M3 x 20)
B 2
3
1
A
4 First Front Back Side
4
Attach the first front panel. • 6 screws (M4 x Hold the bottom part of the first front panel with both hand, and attach it by sliding the top part of panel in to the top panel.
5
Close the second front door.
6
Attach the first front panel.
First Front Side
• 7 screws (M4 x Hold the bottom part of the first front back panel with both hand, and attach it by sliding the top part of panel in to the top panel.
First Front Back Side
7
Install the first front back panel. • 6 screws (M4 x • 1 spacer each (for 4 locations excluding the middle)
Second Front Back Side This completes the attachment procedure of the exterior panels and the insertion unit. Go to «7.2.12 Move to the Installed Location (Page 7-16)» and move the equipment back to the installed location.
7-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 7 Periodic Maintenance
7.2.12 Move to the Installed Location Move the equipment back to the installed location if it was moved.
1 2 3
Move the optical unit to the second front side and fix it using the simple fixing lock. Move the equipment back to the installed location. Release the lock on the optical unit.
Important
Level
4
Push the optical unit slightly towards the back when pulling up the knob. Fixing shaft might move down, and get locked again if the optical unit is at its hithermost position. Also, move the optical unit to confirm that the fixing shaft is not lowered after unlocking.
Fix the equipment using the adjuster (4 locations). Check the level inside the second front door and make sure the bubble is inside the circle.
5
Gently push the equipment to confirm that it is fixed firmly.
This completes the movement to the installed location. Go to «7.2.13 Power ON (Page 7-16)» and turn the power ON on the equipment.
7.2.13 Power ON Connect the Ethernet cable and power cable to the equipment and turn ON the power.
1 2 3
Connect the Ethernet cable and the power supply cable. Turn ON the power supply circuit breaker. Press the «operation» switch. Operation is possible once «READY» is displayed in the message display window. This completes the maintenance operation performed annually.
7-16
0902YG220.book
1 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter Chapter 8
8
Appendix Technical information that can be referenced during repair/ maintenance is described here.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
Service Tool Screen (Unit Test)……………………..8-2 Global Wiring Diagram…………………………………8-9 Circuit Board Silk Screen Diagram ……………… 8-11 Contents of Barcode ………………………………….8-15 Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter……………………………………………………….8-16
0902YG220.book
2 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.1
Service Tool Screen (Unit Test) [Unit Test] screen of the service tool to perform the maintenance features of the REGIUS MODEL 110 is described here.
Display Procedure of the [Unit Test] Screen See «4.2 Display [Unit Test] Screen (Page 4-3)» for the display procedure of [Unit Test] screen.
[Unit Test] Screen
1
2
3
4
No. 1
Item/button
Description
Command operation panel [Unit Test] screen is composed of 8 panels with group of command operation keys. Switch the panel using the tab. See following for the contents of each panel.
• • • • • • • •
8-2
Indicator: DC Motor: Pulse Motor: Linear Motor: Others: Settings: Adjustment: Monitoring:
«8.1.1 [Indicator] Panel (Page 8-3)» «8.1.2 [DC Motor] Panel (Page 8-3)» «8.1.3 [Pulse Motor] Panel (Page 8-4)» «8.1.4 [Linear Motor] Panel (Page 8-5)» «8.1.5 [Others] Panel (Page 8-5)» «8.1.6 [Settings] Panel (Page 8-6)» «8.1.7 [Adjustment] Panel (Page 8-7)» «8.1.8 [Monitoring] Panel (Page 8-8)»
2
Sensor Status
Displays the status of each sensor (OFF/ON), when the operation by a button is completed, for each operation panel. Right after the activation of the reader, the sensor status will be displayed in black if the status is at its default, and in red if it is not.
3
Information
Contents and the result of the executed action is displayed.
4
[Back]
Return to the [Service Tool] screen (reader).
0902YG220.book
3 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.1.1
[Indicator] Panel Confirmation of the operation of the operation panel and the status lamp can be performed in the [Indicator] panel.
1
No. 1
8.1.2
Item/button LED
Description
[Operation LED]
The «operation» lamp (green) will be turned on for 3 seconds.
[Erase LED]
The «erase» lamp (orange) will be turned on for 3 seconds.
[Status LED (B)]
The status lamp (blue) will be turned on for 3 seconds.
[Status LED (U)]
The status lamp (orange) will be turned on for 3 seconds.
[DC Motor] Panel Confirmation of the operation of the shutter and lock/lock release mechanism can be performed in the [DC Motor] panel.
1 2
No. 1
2
Item/button
Description
Shutter Motor
[Open]
Open the shutter at the insertion slot.
[Close]
Close the shutter at the insertion slot.
Lock Motor
[Initialization]
Cassette lock is pushed once.
8-3
0902YG220.book
4 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.1.3
[Pulse Motor] Panel Confirmation of the operation of the receiver and the transporter can be performed in the [Pulse Motor] panel.
1 2 3 4
No.
Item/button
1
Cassette Type
2
Receiver Motor
3
4
Justifier Motor
Transporter Motor
Important
8-4
Description Specify the cassette size to be the standard when the receiver, the justifier guide, and the push plate is to be operated.
[Initialization]
Move other mechanism away before starting the operation of the receiver.
[Move To HP]
Move the receiver to the home position.
[Position 1]
Move the receiver to the position 1.
[Position 2]
Move the receiver to the position 2.
[Transportation Position]
Move the receiver to the transportation position (height when transporting the cassette).
[Initialization]
Move other mechanism away before starting the operation of the justifier guide. See the «Important: Initialization of the Justifier Motor» regarding the operation.
[Move To HP]
Move the justifier guide to the home position.
[Cassette Fixed Position]
Move the justifier guide to the cassette fixing position.
[Cassette Support Position]
Slightly release the justifier guide from the cassette fixation position.
[Initialization]
Move other mechanism away before starting the operation of the transporter unit.
[Move To HP]
Move the push plate unit to the home position.
[Pressing Position]
Move the push plate unit to the pressing position (position to absorb the cassette back plate).
[Reading Position]
Move the push plate to the reading position (position to read/erase the image).
Initialization of the Justifier Motor It will stop with message, «Uploading…» when the [Initialization] button for justifier motor is clicked. Block the light of the insertion slot detection sensor 1 using your hands.
0902YG220.book
5 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.1.4
[Linear Motor] Panel Confirmation of the operation of the subscan unit can be performed in the [Linear Motor] panel.
1 2 3 4
No.
8.1.5
Item/button
Description
1
Cassette Type
Specify the cassette size to be the standard when the subscan unit is to be operated.
2
Read Mode
Specify the mode of the subscan unit during the confirmation of the read action.
3
Erase Mode
Specify the operating speed during the confirmation of the erase action.
4
Subscan Motor
[Initialization]
Move other mechanism away before starting the operation of the subscan unit.
[Move To HP]
Move the holding plate (optical unit) to the home position.
[Read Action]
Move the holding plate to the second front side as in the read action.
[Erase Action]
Move the holding plate to the home position with erase action.
[Others] Panel Confirmation of the barcode reader and the optical unit actions can be performed in the [Others] panel.
1 2
No. 1
2
Item/button Barcode
Optics System
Description
[Start Reading]
Instruct the barcode reader to start the read.
Barcode
The barcode that was read is displayed.
[Polygon Mirror]
Confirm that the polygon mirror rotates properly.
[Halogen Lamp]
Confirm that the halogen lamp turns on properly.
[Fluorescent Lamp]
Confirm that the fluorescent lamp (hot-cathode tube lamp) turns on properly.
8-5
0902YG220.book
6 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.1.6
[Settings] Panel Settings for the reader parameter such as display language and speaker volume, and confirmation of the LCD and speaker operation can be performed in the [Settings] panel.
1 2
No. 1
2
Item/button LCD
Speaker
Description
Language
Select the language to display on the LCD.
[Setting Language]
Display the test screen on the LCD.The back light will be turned ON too.
Volume
Select the volume of the error and warning sound on the speaker.
• [Low] • [Normal] • [High] Demo
Select the type of sound played on the speaker.
• • • • • [Setting Volume]
Important
Important
Pattern 1: Pattern 2: Pattern 3: Pattern 4: Pattern 5:
Sound 1 (pingpong) is played. Sound 2 (beepbeepbeep) is played. Sound 3 (beep) is played. Sound 4 (beepbeep) is played. Sound 5 (ping) is played.
Play the sound selected in [Volume] and [Demo].
Current values right after the «Others» panel was displayed are in the «Language» and «Volume».
To change the displayed language or the speaker volume, see « Setup Procedure for Reader Parameter (page 8-6)».
Setup Procedure for Reader Parameter
1
Change the values for the items that needs to be changed. Following items are reader parameter.
• [LCD] — [Language] • [Speaker] — [Volume]
2
Confirm the operation of the changed items. • Click the [Setting Language] button if you have changed the display language of the LCD. • Click the [Setting Volume] button if you have changed the volume of the speaker.
8-6
0902YG220.book
7 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
Important
8.1.7
The value of the last confirmation performed will be set as a parameter. Always perform the confirmation when changing the setting.
[Adjustment] Panel Adjustment of the justifier mechanism and the transporter mechanism can be performed in the [Adjustment] panel.
1
2
No. 1
2
Item/button Adjustment of Justifier Motor
Adjustment of Pressing Amount
Important
Description
Cassette Type
Specify the cassette size to be the standard when the justifier guide and the push plate are to be operated.
[Initialization]
Move other mechanism away before starting the operation of the justifier mechanism.
[Move To HP]
Move the justifier guide to the home position.
[Position of Justification]
Move the justifier guide to the cassette fixing position.
[Fix and Ejection]
When you click this button, the value for the «Amount of Justification» or «Pressing Amount» when the justification or pressing was performed last will be set as the reader parameter.
Amount of Justification
Setup the compensation value for the cassette fixing position (distance the justifier guide moves to fix the cassette).
[Initialization]
Move other mechanism away before starting the operation of the transporter unit.
[Move To HP]
Move the push plate unit to the home position.
[Pressing Position]
Move the push plate unit to the press down position (position to absorb the cassette back plate).
[Fix and Ejection]
When you click this button, the value for the «Amount of Justification» or «Pressing Amount» when the justification or pressing was performed last will be set as the reader parameter.
Pressing Amount
Setup the compensation value for the press down position (distance the push plate unit moves to absorb the back plate of the cassette).
Current values right after the «Adjustments» panel was displayed are in the «Amount of Justification» and «Pressing Amount».
8-7
0902YG220.book
8 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
Adjustment Procedure • See «6.3 Adjustment of Justifier Motor (Page 6-6)» for the Amount of Justification procedure for the justification.
• See «6.6 Adjustment of Pressing Amount (Page 6-15)» for the Pressing Amount procedure for the pressing.
8.1.8
[Monitoring] Panel Confirmation of the operation can be performed by step operation in accordance to the read action in the [Monitoring] panel.
1
2
No. 1
2
Item/button Sequential Test
Sensor Monitoring
Description
Cassette Type
Select the cassette used to perform the step operation. Select [Cassette] when the actual cassette is to be used. Select the cassette size to be emulated if actual cassette is not used.
[Initialization]
Perform the initialization operation.
[Next]
Perform the operation step by step according to the read sequence every time it is clicked.
[Start]
Start the monitoring of the sensor status.
[Stop]
Stop the monitoring of the sensor status.
Operation Procedure • See «4.4 Confirming by Step Operation (Page 4-8)» for the operation procedure of the [Mechanical Sequence].
• See «4.5 Confirming the Status of the Sensors (Page 4-17)» for the operation procedure of the [Sensors].
8-8
8.2
(UL specification)
Input voltage
(General overseas)
Input voltage
(Europe specification)
Input voltage
Tap switch connector
Inlet
Breaker
Bottom plate
(Japan specification)
Input voltage
Transformer
Exterior frame_3
Noise filter
Capacitor
Bottom plate
(Halogen power supply)
(Analog power supply +12V and +/- 5V)
Interlock SW
Subscan base
Interlock relay 1
Standby power supply
(Digital power supply +5V and +24V)
Correction number: 4, Issued: May 11, 2007
Global Wiring Diagram
2009年8月26日 水曜日 午後5時47分
Interlock relay 2
Cable Bear
Subscan base
Ethernet shielded cable
Ethernet shielded cable
Optical base
Digital power supply cooling fan
Ethernet shielded cable
9 ページ
Detach detection sensor (Upper)
Cooling fan
Halogen lamp
Overheat SW
0902YG220_080aJ.fm
Resistor
Detach detection sensor (Lower)
Lock motor
Hot-cathode tube lamp
Receiver S
Insertion sensor (Center PD)
Receiver HP-S
Insertion sensor Insertion sensor Insertion sensor (Left LED) (Center LED) (Left PD)
Justifier standard S Justifier HP-S
Eraser cooling fan
Inverter
Justifier S
Shutter motor
Lock HP
Sutter close detection S
Polygon driver
Shutter open detection S
Push plate
Back plate absorption detection sensor
Indicator
Center link
(Braided wire)
Transporter HP sensor
Barcode reader
Transporter read sensor
Back board drop detection S
Speaker
Subscan HP-S
Transporter motor
Operation unit
Encoder
Shutter assembly
Justifier motor
Shutter mount plate
Receiver motor
Left side plate
(Braided wire) (Braided wire) (Braided wire)
Motor mount board Exterior frame (front) Receiver base Exterior frame (front) Exterior frame (right) Frame rear right
(Braided wire) (Braided wire) (Braided wire)
Exterior frame (rear) Frame rear and up
LM coil unit
(Braided wire)
Electric component mount panel Receiver base Receiver base Exterior frame (front) Exterior frame (right) Frame rear right
Ethernet shielded cable
8-9
8-10
0902YG220_080aJ.fm
10 ページ
2009年8月26日 水曜日 午後5時47分
0902YG220.book
11 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.3
Circuit Board Silk Screen Diagram 8.3.1
MDU (Mechanism Control Circuit Board)
CN6 CN7
CN5
CN3
CN1
CN4
CN2
CN9 CN11
CN8
8-11
0902YG220.book
12 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.3.2
CIU (System Control Circuit Board) CN1
CN11
CF
CN13
CN5
8-12
0902YG220.book
13 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.3.3
LMC (Optical/Subscan Control Circuit Board) CN8
CN401 CN2 CN7 CN1 CN6 CN302 CN4 CN301 CN402
CN5
CN303
CN9
CN305
8-13
0902YG220.book
14 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.3.4
LMD (Motor Drive Circuit Board) CN1
CN2
8-14
0902YG220.book
15 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.4
Contents of Barcode The number (14 digits) on the barcode label on the cassette is describing the following.
12121231234567
XXXXXXXXXXXxxxxx
Barcode
Cassette Size (2 Digits) 00 : 14 X 17 Inches 01 : 14 X 14 Inches 02 : 11 X 14 Inches 03 : 10 X 12 Inches 04 : 8 X 10 Inches 05 : 24 X 30 cm 06 : 18 X 24 cm 07 : 24 X 30 cm (Mammo) 08 : 18 X 24 cm (Mammo) 09 : 15 X 30 cm 40 : PCM 14 X 17 Inches Other : Spare
Plate Version Number (2 Digits) 00 ~ 19 : For General Imaging 20 ~ 49 : Spare For General Imaging 50 ~ 69 : For Mammography 70 : For PCM Mammography 71 ~ 99 : Spare for Mammography Sensitivity Calibration Data (3 Digits)
Plate Serial Number (7 Digits) Cassette sizes that can be used on the equipment are 00 — 06 and 09.
Important The sensitivity calibration data (3 digits) are not used.
Note
8-15
0902YG220.book
16 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
Chapter 8 Appendix
8.5
Operation of the Acoustic Wave Tension Meter Use the acoustic wave tension meter to adjust the belt tension and the wire tension. Manufacturer: Gates Unitta Asia Product name: Sonic Belt Tension Meter Model: U-505 or U-507 This section describes how to operate U-505 for measurement. ([WEIGHT] button will be [MASS] button in case of U-507.)
Caution
Before using the acoustic wave tension meter, always read and understand the Operation Manual for the acoustic wave tension meter.
1 2 3
Attach the microphone to the body of the tension meter. Turn ON by pressing the [POWER] button. Select the [Input No.]. Select in one of following method.
• Press the [SELECT] button multiple times.(Number will change in sequence.)
• Press the number on the numeric keypad.
4
Input the M (unit mass value). Input the value from numeric keypad after pressing the [WEIGHT] button. Press the buttons in following order to input «1.3».
POWER
MEASURE
[WEIGHT] → [0] → [0] → [1] → [3]
WEIGHT
WIDTH
SPAN
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
Hz
SELECT
5
Input the W (belt width value). Input the value from numeric keypad after pressing the [WIDTH] button.
6
Input the S (span length value). Input the value from numeric keypad after pressing the [SPAN] button.
7 8 9
Place the microphone close to the center of the span of the object to measure, but not touching. Press [MEASURE] button. Vibrate the object by tapping it with the finger. The result is displayed when the vibration sound is detected and the measurement is performed.
8-16
0902YG220.book
17 ページ 2009年8月27日 木曜日 午後3時20分
0902YG220F
20090827MD